Subaru 2004 Forester X Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Subaru Subaru-2004-Forester-X-Owners-Manual-762945 subaru-2004-forester-x-owners-manual-762945 subaru pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 439 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s Man-

ual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excel-

lent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system

for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual

carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation.

For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such as details

concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the dealer from

whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual

are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES

LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any

time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to

make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This

Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, in-

cluding factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may

be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next

owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

and are registered trademarks of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.

HSF029AA

– CONTINUED –

Warranties

Warranties for U.S.A.

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of Ameri-

ca, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU

dealer in the United States come with the following

warranties:

SUBARU Limited Warranty

Emission Control Systems Warranty

Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details of coverage

and exclusions, is in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”. Please read these warranties carefully.

Warranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada,

Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU deal-

er in Canada come with the following warranties:

SUBARU Limited Warranty

Anti-Corrosion Warranty

Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details of coverage

and exclusions, is in the Warranty and Service Book-

let. Please read these warranties carefully.

This vehicle does not contain mer-

cury devices or parts.

How to use this owner’s manual

Using your Owner’s manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this

manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life

of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may result in se-

rious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each

chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you

can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seat-

belt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate the keys,

locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the operation of instru-

ment panel indicators and how to use the instruments

and other switches.

Chapter 4: Climate Control

This chapter informs you how to operate the climate

control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate your audio

system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate interior

equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and operate your

SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU

in various conditions and explains some safety tips on

driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you have a prob-

lem while driving, such as a flat tire or engine over-

heating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU

looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need to take your

SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance

and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimension and capac-

ities of your SUBARU.

– CONTINUED –

Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting

safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality

grading standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in this manu-

al. You can use it to quickly find something you want

to read.

Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and

NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards

that could result in injury to you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well as all other

portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a bet-

ter understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle

safely.

A WARNING indicates a situation in which seri-

ous injury or death could result if the warning is

ignored.

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury

or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result

if the caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to

make better use of your vehicle.

Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it in this man-

HSF019AA

ual. This symbol means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or

“Do not let this happen”, depending upon the context. Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may see on your

vehicle.

Mark Name

CAUTION

Power door lock

Passenger’s windows lock

Fuel

Front fog lights

Parking lights

Hazard warning flasher

Cigarette lighter

– CONTINUED –

Engine hood

Seat heater

Child restraint top tether anchorages

Child restraint lower anchorages

Horn

Windshield wiper deicer

Wiper intermittent

Windshield wiper and washer

Rear window wiper and washer

Mark Name

Lights

Parking lights, tail lights, license plate

light and instrument panel illumination

Head lights

Illumination brightness

Fan speed

Instrument panel outlets

Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets

Foot outlets

Windshield defroster and foot outlets

Windshield defroster

Mark Name

Safety precautions when driving

Seatbelt and SRS airbag

All persons in the vehicle should fasten their

seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move.

Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be-

comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or

accident.

To obtain maximum protection in the event of

an accident, the driver and all passengers in the

vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the

vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental Re-

straint System) airbag does not do away with

the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination

with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined

protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of

severe injury or death in a crash even when the

car has the SRS airbag.

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable

speed and force. Occupants who are out of

proper position when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries. Because the

SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-

Outside mirror defogger

Rear window defogger

Air recirculation

Engine oil

Washer

Mark Name

– CONTINUED –

ment, the driver should always sit upright and

well back in the seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

Carefully read the sections “Seatbelts” and “*SRS air-

bag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)” in chap-

ter 1 of this owner’s manual for instructions and pre-

cautions concerning the seatbelt system and SRS air-

bag system.

Child safety

Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms

while the vehicle is moving. The passenger

cannot protect the child from injury in a colli-

sion, because the child will be caught between

the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.

While riding in the vehicle, infants and small

children should always be placed in the REAR

seat in an infant or child restraint system which

is appropriate for the child’s age, height and

weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the REAR seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the rear seating po-

sitions than in the front seating positions. Nev-

er allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all times in a child

restraint device or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed and force and

can injure or even kill children, especially if

they are 12 years of age and under and are not

restrained or improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk being injured from deployment is

greater.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING

CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE

CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Always use the child safety locks whenever a

child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could

result if a child accidentally opened the door

and fell out. Refer to the “Child safety locks”

section in chapter 2.

Always lock the passenger’s windows using

the lock switch when children are riding in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could

result in injury to a child operating the power

window. Refer to the “Windows” section in

chapter 2.

Never leave unattended children in the vehi-

cle. They could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent operation of the

vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to them.

Carefully read the sections “Child restraint sys-

tems”,“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System

airbag)”, and “Seatbelts” in chapter 1 of this owner’s

manual for instructions and precautions concerning

the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS

airbag system.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monox-

ide)

Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex-

haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color-

less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or

even lethal, if inhaled.

Always properly maintain the engine exhaust

system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en-

tering the vehicle.

Never run the engine in a closed space, such

as a garage, except for the brief time needed to

drive the vehicle in or out of it.

Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a

lengthy time while the engine is running. If that

is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to

force fresh air into the vehicle.

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to

ensure that the ventilation system always

works properly.

If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon as possible. If

you must drive under these conditions, drive

– CONTINUED –

only with all windows fully open.

Keep the rear gate closed while driving to

prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

Drinking and driving

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.

Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reac-

tion and impairs your perception, judgment and

attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even

if you drink just a little – it will increase the risk

of being involved in a serious or fatal accident,

injuring or killing yourself, your passengers

and others. In addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the severity of

that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently,

you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below

the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never

drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before

getting behind the wheel.

Drugs and driving

There are some drugs (over the counter and

prescription) that can delay your reaction time

and impair your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it

may increase your, your passengers’ and other

persons’ risk of being involved in a serious or

fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or

pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the

medication to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any

medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise

affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If

you have a medical condition that requires you to take

drugs, please consult with your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit

mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-be-

ing, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first

place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to

those drugs.

Driving when tired or sleepy

When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will

be delayed and your perception, judgment and

attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers’

and other persons’ chances of being involved

in a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe

place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips,

you should make periodic rest stops to refresh your-

self before continuing on your journey. When possible,

you should share the driving with others.

Modification of your vehicle

Your vehicle should not be modified. Modifica-

tion could affect its performance, safety or du-

rability, and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from modification

may not be covered under warranties.

Mobile phones and driving

Do not use a hand-held phone while driving; it

may distract your attention from driving and

can lead to an accident. If you use a hand-held

phone, pull off the road and park in the safe

place before using your phone. In some States/

Provinces, only hands-free phones may legally

be used while driving.

Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and

distract your attention from driving. In a collision or

sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be

thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your

passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under

– CONTINUED –

these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets

should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain

a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se-

cured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet car-

rier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a

seatbelt through the carrier’s handle. Never restrain

pets or pet carriers in the front passenger’s seat. For

further information, consult your veterinarian, local an-

imal protection society or pet shop.

Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each

tire (including the spare) at least once a month and be-

fore any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Use a

pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the val-

ues shown on the tire placard.

Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in chapter 11

for detailed information.

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire

pressures can cause the tires to deform severe-

ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase

in temperature could cause tread separation,

and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss

of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

California proposition 65 warning

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehi-

cles and certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

Illustrated index

Exterior

123 4 5

78910

HSF020BB

1) Engine hood (page 11-5)

2) Headlight switch (page 3-17)

3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-62)

4) Wiper switch (page 3-24)

5) Roof rails (page 8-17)

6) Door locks (page 2-3)

7) Tire pressure (page 11-42)

8) Flat tires (page 9-3)

9) Tire chains (page 8-13)

10) Front fog light switch (page 3-

22)

11) Tie-down/Towing hooks (page

9-13)

– CONTINUED –

45 HSF021BB

1) Rear window defogger switch

(page 3-28)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)

3) Child safety locks (page 2-20)

4) Tie-down/Towing hook (page 9-

13)

5) Rear gate (page 2-24)

Interior

Passenger compartment area

123

456

HSF022BB

1) Lower anchorage for child re-

straint system (page 1-43)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-12)

3) Moonroof (page 2-26)

4) Parking brake lever (page 7-27)

5) Front seat (page 1-2)

6) Rear seat (page 1-9)

– CONTINUED –

45 HSF023BB

1) Cup holder (page 6-8)

2) Center console (page 6-5)

3) Glove box (page 6-5)

4) Cigarette lighter socket (page 6-

11)

5) Ashtray (page 6-14)

Instrument panel

12 3 4 5 67

89101112141516 13

HSF024BB

1) Door locks (page 2-3)

2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-

32)

3) Light control lever (page 3-17)

4) Combination meter (page 3-5)

5) Wiper control lever (page 3-22)

6) Hazard warning flasher switch

(page 3-5)

7) Audio (page 5-2)

8) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-

11)/Selector lever (AT) (page 7-

14)

9) Climate control (page 4-2)

10) Cruise control (page 7-31)

11) Horn (page 3-35)

12) SRS airbag (page 1-50)

13) Tilt steering (page 3-34)

14) Fuse (page 11-58)/Coin tray

(page 6-7)

15) Hood lock release (page 11-5)

16) Power window (page 2-21)

– CONTINUED –

Light control and wiper control levers/switches

HSF025BB

1) Parking light switch (page 3-21)

2) Windshield wiper (page 3-24)

3) Mist (page 3-25)

4) Windshield washer (page 3-25)

5) Rear window wiper and washer

switch (page 3-26)

6) Wiper control lever (page 3-24)

7) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-21)

8) Light control lever (page 3-17)

9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-17)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low

beam change (page 3-17)

11) Turn signal (for lane change)

(page 3-20)

12) Turn signal (page 3-20)

Combination meter

Overview

FUEL DOOR

MPH

Fx1000r/min

x1000r/min

km/h

23 41

567

HSF026BB

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-5)

4) Tachometer (page 3-6)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-5)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page

3-5)

7) Outside temperature indicator

(page 3-8)

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator light

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-10

SRS airbag system warning

light 3-10

CHECK ENGINE warning

light/Malfunction indicator

lamp

3-11

Charge warning light 3-12

Oil pressure warning light 3-12

AT OIL temperature warning

light (if equipped) 3-12

or ABS warning light 3-12

or Brake system warning light 3-13

Door open warning light 3-15

Front-wheel drive warning

light (if equipped) 3-15

Low fuel warning light 3-15

Turn signal indicator lights 3-15

High beam indicator light 3-16

Security system indicator

light (if equipped) 2-14

Cruise control indicator light

(if equipped) 3-16

Mark Name Page

Tire changing tools

HSF027BB

1) Jack (page 9-19)

2) Jack handle (page 9-19)

3) Spare tire (page 9-3)

– CONTINUED –

Cargo area cover

HSF018BB

1) Cargo area cover (page 6-16)

2) Cargo tie-down hook (page 6-

18)

3) Accessory power outlet (page 6-

4) Shopping bag hook (page 6-18)

1-1

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats .................................................... 1-2

Fore and aft adjustment ................................... 1-3

Reclining the seatback ..................................... 1-4

Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ............ 1-5

Lumbar support ................................................ 1-5

Head restraint adjustment ................................ 1-6

Active head restraint ........................................ 1-7

Seat heater (if equipped) .............................. 1-8

Rear seats ..................................................... 1-9

Headrest adjustment ........................................ 1-10

Folding down the rear seatback ...................... 1-11

Seatbelts ....................................................... 1-12

Seatbelt safety tips ........................................... 1-12

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .............. 1-13

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor

(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-14

Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 1-14

Fastening the seatbelt ...................................... 1-14

Seatbelt maintenance ....................................... 1-26

Seatbelt extender ......................................... 1-27

Front seatbelt pretensioners ....................... 1-28

System monitors ............................................... 1-30

System servicing .............................................. 1-31

Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-31

Child restraint systems ................................ 1-32

Where to place a child restraint system ......... 1-34

Choosing a child restraint system .................. 1-36

Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR

seatbelt ............................................................ 1-36

Installing a booster seat ................................... 1-41

Installation of child restraint systems by use

of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .... 1-43

Top tether anchorages ..................................... 1-47

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag) ........................................... 1-50

Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS airbags and lap/shoulder restraints ..... 1-50

SRS frontal airbag ............................................ 1-55

SRS side airbag (if equipped) .......................... 1-63

SRS airbag system monitors ........................... 1-71

SRS airbag system servicing .......................... 1-72

Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-73

1-2

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat, seat belt and SRS airb ags

Front seats

Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid

the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of

personal injury.

Before adjusting the seat, make sure the

hands and feet of rear seat passengers are

clear of the adjusting mechanism.

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when

the occupant sits well back and upright in the

seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the

seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks

should be always used in the upright position

while the vehicle is running. If the front seat-

backs are not used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt

and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in serious in-

ternal injury or death.

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat

properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed and force and

can injure or even kill children, especially if

they are 12 years of age and under and are not

restrained or improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from deployment is

greater. For that reason, we strongly recom-

mend that ALL children (including those in

child seats and those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly

HS1034BA

1-3

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

restrained at all times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Secure ALL

types of child restraint devices (including for-

ward facing child seat) in the REAR seats at all

times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE

TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-

ing positions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precautions con-

cerning child restraint systems, see the “Child

restraint systems” section in this chapter.

Fore and aft adjustment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired

position. Then release the lever and move the seat

back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked

into place.

HS1035BA

1-4

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Reclining the seatback

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to

the desired position. Then release the lever and make

sure the seatback is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring

back upward with force when released. When operat-

ing the reclining lever to return the seatback, hold it

lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.

To prevent the passenger from sliding under

the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always

put the seatback in the upright position while

the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place ob-

jects such as cushions between the passenger

and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of slid-

ing under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will increase, and both

can result in serious internal injury or death.

HS1036BA

HS1037BA

1-5

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat)

1) Turn the dial backward to lower the seat.

2) Turn the dial forward to raise the seat.

Use the adjusting dial to adjust the height of the seat.

Lumbar support

Pull the lever forward or backward.

Pulling the lever forward will increase the amount of

support for your lower back.

HS1038BB HS1045BA

1-6

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Head restraint adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so that the cen-

ter of the head restraint is closest to the top of the oc-

cupant’s ears.

Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints

removed because they are designed to reduce

the risk of serious neck injury in the event that

the vehicle is struck from the rear.

NOTE

If the seatback is reclined rearward to the same

level as the rear seat cushion with the head re-

straint removed, a wide flat bed is made available.

1. Slide the front seat forward as far as possible.

2. Pull off the head restraint while pressing the re-

lease button.

3. Recline the seatback rearward up to the lowest po-

sition. Remember to reinstall the head restraint when-

ever the seatback is raised back.

HS1039BA

HS1040BA

1-7

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Never drive your car with the seats converted

in a flat bed position. If you do so, occupants

will have a greater chance of being injured even

during simple deceleration, acceleration and

cornering since no firm restraint will be avail-

able for them.

Before you lie on the flat bed to take a rest,

read the description “Parking your vehicle” in

Chapter 7 carefully and follow the instructions.

Active head restraint

The front seats of your vehicle are equipped with ac-

tive head restraints. They automatically tilt forward

slightly in the event the vehicle is struck from the rear,

decreasing the amount of rearward head movement

and thus reducing the risk of whiplash. For maximum

effectiveness the head restraint should be adjust so

that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top

of the occupant’s ears.

Each active head restraint is effective only

when its height is properly adjusted and the

user sits in the correct position on the seat.

Each active head restraint is designed to

work only once. If your vehicle is involved in a

rear-end collision, have an authorized SUBARU

dealer inspect the active head restraints.

The active head restraints may not operate in

the event the vehicle experiences only a slight

impact in the rear.

The active head restraints may be damaged if

they are pushed hard from behind or subjected

to shock. As a result, they may not function if

the vehicle suffers a rear impact

HS1105BA

1-8

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat heater (if equipped)

HI — Rapid heating

LO – Normal heating

The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is

either in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or “HI” posi-

tion on the switch, as desired, depending on the tem-

perature. Selecting the “HI” position will cause the seat

to heat up quicker.

The indicator located on the switch comes on when

the seat heater is in operation. When the vehicle’s in-

terior is warmed enough or before you leave the vehi-

cle, be sure to turn the switch off.

There is a possibility that people with delicate

skin may suffer slight burns even at low tem-

peratures if he/she uses the seat heater for a

long period of time. When using the heater, al-

ways be sure to warn the persons concerned.

Do not put anything on the seat which insu-

lates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion,

or similar items. This may cause the seat heater

to overheat.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period of time

while the engine is not running can cause battery

discharge.

When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,

paint thinner, or any similar materials.

US1507BB

1-9

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Rear seats

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the

occupant sits well back and upright in the seat.

Do not put cushions or any other materials be-

tween occupants and seatbacks or seat cush-

ions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the

lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than

the top of the seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

HS1043BA

HS8005BA

1-10

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Headrest adjustment

Rear windows side seating position

To raise the headrest, pull it up.

To lower it, push the headrest down while depressing

the release button on the top of the seatback.

When the seats are not occupied, lower the headrest

to improve rearward visibility.

Rear center seating position

To raise the headrest, pull it up.

To lower it, push the headrest down while pressing the

release button on the top of the seatback.

When the rear-center seating position is occupied,

place the headrest in its highest position. When the

rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the

headrest to improve rearward visibility.

HS1046BA

HS1106BA

1-11

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Folding down the rear seatback 1. Lower the headrests.

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob

and then fold the seatback down.

To return the seatback to its original position, raise the

seatback until it locks into place and make sure that it

is securely locked.

After returning the rear seatback to its origi-

nal position, make certain that the shoulder

belts are fully visible.

Never allow passengers to ride on the folded

rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so

may result in serious injury or death.

Secure lengthy items properly to prevent

them from shooting forward and causing seri-

ous injury during a sudden stop.

HS1047BA

HS1048BA

1-12

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seatbelts

Seatbelt safety tips

All persons in the vehicle should fasten their

seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move.

Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury be-

comes greater in the event of a sudden stop or

accident.

All belts should fit snugly in order to provide

full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as ef-

fective in preventing or reducing injury.

Each seatbelt is designed to support only

one person. Never use a single belt for two or

more persons — even children. Otherwise, in

an accident, serious injury or death could re-

sult.

Replace all seatbelt assemblies including re-

tractors and attaching hardware worn by occu-

pants of a vehicle that has been in a serious ac-

cident. The entire assembly should be replaced

even if damage is not obvious.

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear

seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill children, espe-

cially if they are 12 years of age and under and

are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-

cause children are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. For that reason, we strongly

recommend that ALL children (including those

in child seats and those that have outgrown

child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in a child re-

straint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is ap-

propriate for the child’s height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in-

cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR

seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE

TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-

ing positions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the child restraint system, see the

“Child restraint systems” section in this chap-

1-13

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

ter.

Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your ve-

hicle. See information on “Child restraint systems” in

this chapter.

Children

If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child

should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the

seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in the rear seating po-

sitions than in the front seating positions. Never allow

a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or

neck, adjust the shoulder belt anchor height (window-

side seating positions only) and then if necessary

move the child closer to the belt buckle to help provide

a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to secure-

ly place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and

not on the child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the

belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint

system should be used. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind the child’s back.

Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts.

They should consult their doctor for specific recom-

mendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and

as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Re-

tractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows normal body

movement but the retractor locks automatically during

a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quick-

ly out of the retractor.

HS1107AA

1-14

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (A/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/

Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as

an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR

has an additional locking mode “Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode” intended to secure a child re-

straint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn out

completely and is then retracted even slightly, the re-

tractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seat-

belt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor func-

tions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully,

the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on the rear

seats by the use of the seatbelt, the seatbelt must be

changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is removed, make

sure that the seatbelt retracts fully and the retractor re-

turned to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode.

For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the

ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode, see the

“Child restraint systems” section in this chapter.

Seatbelt warning light and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning de-

vice at the driver’s seat, as required by current safety

standards.

This device causes the seatbelt warning light on the

instrument panel to light up for about six seconds

when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” to remind the

driver to wear the seatbelt. If the driver’s seatbelt is not

fastened, a warning chime sounds at the same time.

Fastening the seatbelt

Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In

an accident, this can increase the risk or sever-

ity of injury.

Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your

hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of

across the weaker abdomen.

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when

the occupant sits well back and upright in the

seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the

seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks

should be always used in the upright position

while the vehicle is running. If the front seat-

1-15

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

backs are not used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt

and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result in serious in-

ternal injury or death.

Do not put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks or seat

cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over

the abdomen will increase, and both can result

in serious internal injury or death.

Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or

behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can

increase the risk or severity of injury.

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very

hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sun-

ny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do

not touch such hot parts until they cool.

Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright posi-

tion. Move the seatback as far from the steering wheel

as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far back as possi-

ble.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly.

Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach-

ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out

HS1049BA

1-16

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the

belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull

it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you

hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder

belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips,

not on your waist.

HS1050BA

HS1051BB

1-17

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor

height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to

the position best suited for you.

To lower the anchor height, push the release button

and slide the anchor down.

To raise the anchor height, slide the anchor up. Pull

down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in

place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder

belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without

touching the neck.

When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the

shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass

over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt an-

chor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder

belt over the neck may result in neck injury dur-

ing sudden braking or in a collision.

Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are

retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing

HS1052BA

HS1053BA

1-18

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

in the door.

Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly.

Do not let it get twisted. If the belt stops before reach-

ing the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out

more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the

belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then

pull it out slowly again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you

hear a click.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder

belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips,

not on your waist.

HS1050BA

HS1051BC

1-19

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Adjusting the rear seat shoulder belt anchor

height (window-side seating positions only)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to

the position best suited for you.

To lower the anchor height, push the release button

and slide the anchor down.

To raise the anchor height, slide the anchor up. Pull

down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in

place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder

belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without

touching the neck.

When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the

shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass

over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt an-

chor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder

belt over the neck may result in neck injury dur-

ing sudden braking or in a collision.

Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are

retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing

HS1052BA

HS1053BA

1-20

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

in the door.

Rear center seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)

3) Connector (buckle)

4) Center seatbelt buckle

Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted

can increase the risk or severity of injury in an

accident. When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, especially when

inserting the connector’s tongue plate into the

mating buckle (on right-hand side), always

check that the webbing is not twisted.

US1527BB

HS1054BA

1-21

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the re-

spective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as

a shoulder belt (with the connector’s tongue

plate not fastened to the connector’s buckle on

the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain

the wearer in position in an accident, possibly

resulting in serious injury or death.

Rear-center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the

ceiling.

1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate from the

holder located at the front of the recess by pulling the

connector (tongue) plate rearward.

HS1055BA HS1065CA

1-22

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead re-

tractor.

1) Seatbelt comfort guide

3. Pass the seatbelt through the seatbelt comfort

guide located beside the headrest.

HS1057BA

HS1058BB

1-23

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

4. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, in-

sert the connector (tongue) attached at the webbing

end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click

is heard.

If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the

belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still

cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after

giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate in the center

seatbelt buckle marked “CENTER” on the left-hand

side until it clicks.

HS1059BA HS1060BA

1-24

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder

belt.

7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips,

not on your waist.

Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle

(on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE

When the seatback is folded down for greater car-

go area, it is necessary to disconnect the connec-

tor.

HS1061BC

HS1062BA

1-25

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed object into the

slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side

and push it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will

disconnect from the buckle.

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should

hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retrac-

tor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plates

in the recess in the retractor and then insert the con-

nector (tongue) plate into the slot located at the front

of the recess.

HS1063BA

HS1064BA

HS1065BA

1-26

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seat-

belt too quickly. Otherwise, the metal tongue

plates may hit against the trim, resulting in

damaged trim.

Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the

tongue plates are neatly stored. A hanging

tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim

during driving, causing damage to the trim.

Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm

water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this

could seriously affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the

webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts,

gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-

place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is

found.

Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemi-

cals and particularly battery acid.

Never attempt to make modifications or

changes that will prevent the seatbelt from op-

erating properly.

HS1066BA

1-27

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt extender

If the front seatbelts are not long enough to permit the

tongue plate to engage with the seatbelt buckle, an

optional seatbelt extender is available from your

SUBARU dealer. When ordering an extender, only or-

der one particularly designed for your vehicle. Several

different types of extenders are available to match var-

ious varieties of front seatbelt designs. See your

SUBARU dealer for assistance.

The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm)

of length and it can be used for either the driver or front

passenger seating position.

Be sure to observe the following when using

the seatbelt extender.

Failure to follow these instructions and warn-

ings could reduce the effectiveness of the seat-

belt and result in more serious injury in the

event of a collision.

Never use the extender when the belt itself is

long enough to permit it to be buckled properly.

If removal of heavy clothing is all that is needed

to permit the seatbelt to be buckled properly,

remove the heavy clothing and do not use the

extender.

Do not use the extender if the buckle of the

extender rests over the abdomen.

Do not let someone else use the extender.

Use of an extender when it is not needed could

reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and re-

sult in more serious injury in the event of a col-

lision.

Use the extender only for the front seatbelts

and only for the model for which it was original-

ly provided. Never use the extender for the rear

seatbelts or for a different model.

NOTE

When the seatbelt extender is used by a pregnant

passenger, consult a doctor to get approval in ad-

vance.

1-28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the

tongue plate into the seatbelt buckle so that the

“PRESS” signs on the buckle-release buttons of the

extender and the seatbelt are both facing outward as

shown in the diagram. You will hear a click when the

tongue plate locks into the buckle.

When releasing the seatbelt, press on the buckle-re-

lease button on the extender, not on the seatbelt. This

helps to prevent damage to the vehicle interior and ex-

tender itself.

For the safety of others, the extender should be re-

moved after each use, especially if the next person us-

ing the seatbelt does not need one.

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelts have a

seatbelt pretensioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are

designed to be activated in the event of an accident in-

volving a moderate to severe frontal collision.

Also, the seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in the event of an accident involving a mod-

erate to severe side impact collision.

The pretensioner sensor also serves as the frontal and

side SRS airbag sensors. If the sensors detect a cer-

tain predetermined amount of force during a frontal

collision or a side impact collision, the front seatbelt is

US1110BA

HS1067BA

1-29

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the

slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the

front seat occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operat-

ing noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke

will be released. These occurrences are normal and

not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the

vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated,

the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently,

the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and

therefore must be replaced.

NOTE

Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to acti-

vate in minor frontal impacts, in minor side im-

pacts or in rear impacts or in roll-over accidents.

The driver’s seat and passenger’s seat preten-

sioners and frontal SRS airbag operate simulta-

neously.

The driver’s seat and passenger’s seat preten-

sioners and the SRS side airbag operate simulta-

neously.

Pretensioners are designed to function on a

one-time-only basis. In the event that a preten-

sioner is activated, both the driver’s and front pas-

senger’s seatbelt retractor assemblies must be re-

placed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use

only genuine SUBARU parts.

If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot

be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of

the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or sur-

rounding area has been damaged, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to ex-

plain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretension-

ers by alerting him to the contents of this section.

To obtain maximum protection, the occu-

pants should sit in an upright position with

their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to the

“Seatbelts” section in this chapter.

Do not modify, remove or strike the front

seatbelt retractor assemblies or surrounding

area. This could result in accidental activation

of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the

system inoperative, possibly resulting in seri-

ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no

user-serviceable parts. For required servicing

of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seat-

1-30

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

belt pretensioners, see your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

When discarding front seatbelt retractor as-

semblies or scrapping the entire car due to col-

lision damage or for other reasons, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi-

ness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is

being driven. The seatbelt pretensioners share the

control module with the SRS airbag system. There-

fore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt preten-

sioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illumi-

nate. The SRS airbag system warning light will show

normal system operation by lighting for about 6 sec-

onds when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion.

The following components are monitored by the indi-

cator:

Front sub sensor (Right hand side)

Front sub sensor (Left hand side)

Side airbag sensor (Driver’s side)

Side airbag sensor (Passenger’s side)

Airbag control module (including impact sensors)

Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

Seatbelt pretensioner (Passenger’s side)

All related wiring

And all other airbag components

In the event of a malfunction indicated by any of follow-

ing, the vehicle should be taken promptly to your near-

est SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Un-

less checked and repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners

and SRS airbag will not function reliably:

Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.

No illumination of the warning light when the ignition

switch is first turned to the “ON” position.

Continuous illumination of the warning light.

HS1103BA

1-31

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Illumination of the warning light while driving.

System servicing

When discarding a seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or scrapping the entire car damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.

Tampering with or disconnecting the sys-

tem’s wiring could result in accidental activa-

tion of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS air-

bag or could make the system inoperative,

which may result in serious injury. The wiring

harnesses of the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS

airbag systems are covered with yellow insula-

tion and the connectors of the system are yel-

low for easy identification. Do not use electrical

test equipment on any circuit related to the

seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems.

For required servicing of the seatbelt preten-

sioner, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.

The front sub sensors are located near the bot-

tom of the radiator and the side airbag sensor

is located inside each center piller and the SRS

airbag control module including the impact

sensors is located under the center console. If

you need service or repair in those areas or

near the front seatbelt retractors, we recom-

mend that you have an authorized SUBARU

dealer perform the work.

NOTE

If the front part of the vehicle is damaged in an ac-

cident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner

does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

Precautions against vehicle modifica-

tion

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in-

stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.

Do not perform any of the following modifica-

tions. Such modifications can interfere with

proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners.

Attachment of any equipment (bush bar,

1-32

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than

SUBARU genuine accessory parts to the front

end.

Modification of the suspension system or

front end structure.

Installation of a tire of different size and con-

struction from the tires specified on the tire

placard attached to the driver’s door jamb.

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always be placed in

an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while

riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child

restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is ap-

propriate for the child’s age and size. All child restraint

systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats

by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those covered under the section in this manu-

al, entitled “Installation of child restraint systems by

use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH)”).

UG1086BA

1-33

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Children could be endangered in an accident if their

child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle.

When installing the child restraint system, carefully fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the rear seating positions

than in the front seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that in-

fants and small children be restrained in an approved

child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her

lap or in his or her arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot protect the

child from injury in a collision, because the

child will be caught between the passenger and

objects inside the vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms

in the front seat exposes that child to another

serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force, the child

could be injured or even killed.

HS1069BA

1-34

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Children should be properly restrained at all

times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to

kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop or in an ac-

cident and can be injured seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or kneeling

on or in front of the front seat are exposed an-

other serious danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

Where to place a child restraint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommendations on

where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint system due to

the hazard to children posed by the passenger’s air-

bag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating positions

Recommended positions for all types of child restraint

systems.

In these positions, Automatic/Emergency Locking Re-

tractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and lower anchor bars are

provided for installing a child restraint system.

HS1070BA

US1575AA

1-35

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

C: Rear seat, center seating position

Installing a child restraint system is not recommended,

although the A/ELR seatbelt is provided in this posi-

tion.

Some types of child restraints might not be able to be

secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use only a child re-

straint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly

against the contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat

properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag

deploys with considerable speed and force and

can injure or even kill children, especially if

they are 12 years of age and under and are not

restrained or improperly restrained. Because

children are lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from deployment is

greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of

child restraint devices (including forward fac-

ing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

You should choose a restraint device which is

appropriate for the child’s age, height and

weight. According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front seating

positions.

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A

PASSENGER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL

A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT

IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING

SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

HS1072BA

1-36

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Choosing a child restraint system

Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for

the child’s age and size (weight and height) in order to

provide the child with proper protection. The child re-

straint system should meet all applicable requirements

of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United

States or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for

Canada. It can be identified by locking for the label on

the child restraint system or the manufacture’s state-

ment of compliance in the document attached to the

system. Also it is important for you to make sure that

the child restraint system is compatible with the vehi-

cle in which it will be used.

Installing child restraint systems with

A/ELR seatbelt

Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-

come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up

in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.

Check the child restraint system before you

place a child in it.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint

system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-

straint systems can be thrown around inside of

the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it

can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well

as result in serious injuries or death to the

child.

When you install a child restraint system, fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied

UGS507AA

1-37

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

with it. After installing the child restraint sys-

tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in

position. If it is not held tight and secure, the

danger of your child suffering personal injury in

the event of an accident may be increased.

Installing a rearward facing child restraint

1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating

position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around

the child restraint system following the instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you

hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to

change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into

the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be

heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

UGS508BA

UGS509BA

1-38

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

6. Push and pull the child restraint system forward

and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured.

Sometime a child restraint can be more firmly secured

by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then

tightening the seat belt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm

that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

8. To remove the child restraint system, press the re-

lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt

to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR

mode.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S

HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

UGS510BA UG1089BA

1-39

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

When the child restraint system is no longer in

use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the

retractor. That function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

Installing forward facing child restraint

1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating

position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around

the child restraint system following the instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle untill you

hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to

change the retractor over from the Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into

the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be

heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

US1581BA

US1582BA

1-40

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

6. Before having a child sit in the child restraint sys-

tem, move it back and forth and right and left to check

if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can

be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm

that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

8. If the child restraint system requires a top tether,

latch the hook onto the top tether anchor and tighten

the top tether. See the “Top tether anchorages” for ad-

ditional instructions.

US1583BA US1594BA

1-41

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

9. To remove the child restraint system, press the re-

lease button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt

to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR

mode. Unhook the top tether hook from the top tether

anchor.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no longer in

use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the

retractor. That function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

Installing a booster seat

Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-

come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up

in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.

Check the child restraint system before you

place a child in it.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint

system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-

straint systems can be thrown around inside of

the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it

can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well

as result in serious injuries or death to the

child.

When you install a child restraint system, fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied

with it. After installing the child restraint sys-

tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in

position. If it is not held tight and secure, the

danger of your child suffering personal injury in

UG1094BA

1-42

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

the event of an accident may be increased.

1. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position

and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on

the booster seat.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around

the booster seat and the child following the instruc-

tions provided by its manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you

hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the

center of child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is posi-

tioned as low as possible on the child’s hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press the release but-

ton on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.

Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In

an accident, this can increase the risk or sever-

ity of injury to the child.

Never place the shoulder belt under the

child’s arm or behind the child’s back. If an ac-

cident occurs, this can increase the risk or se-

verity of injury to the child.

The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to pro-

vide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as

US1585BA

US1586BA

1-43

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

effective in preventing or reducing injury.

Place the lap belt as low as possible on the

child’s hips. A high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious internal injury or

death.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may result in

neck injury during sudden braking or in a colli-

sion.

Installation of child restraint systems

by use of lower and tether anchorages

(LATCH)

Child restraint systems and seatbelts can be-

come hot in a vehicle that has been closed up

in sunny weather; they could burn a small child.

Check the child restraint system before you

place a child in it.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint

system in your vehicle. Unsecured child re-

straint systems can be thrown around inside of

the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it

can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well

as result in serious injuries or death to the

child.

When you install a child restraint system, fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions supplied

with it. After installing the child restraint sys-

tem, check to ensure that it is held securely in

position. If it is not held tight and secure, the

danger of your child suffering personal injury in

the event of an accident may be increased.

1-44

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Some types of child restraint systems can be installed

on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seat-

belts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the

designated anchorages provided on the vehicle body.

The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes re-

ferred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages

(bars) and three upper anchorages (tether anchorag-

es) for accommodating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a

child restraint system only on the rear seat window-

side seating positions. For each window-side seating

position, two lower anchorages are provided.

Each anchor bar is located where the seat cushion

meets the seatback.

US1112BA HS1076BA

1-45

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are pro-

vided for all the seating positions (middle and both

window-side ones) of the rear seat.

You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the rear

seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of

the lower anchorages (bars).

HS1077BA HS1078BA

1-46

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cush-

ion meets the seatback.

1. Use the “ ” marks to locate the two lower an-

chorages (bars) for the position where you want to in-

stall the child restraint system.

2. While following the instructions supplied by the

child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower

hooks onto the lower anchorages located at “ ”

marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the

hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seat-

belts are not caught.

HS1079BA US1588CA

1-47

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

3. [If your child restraint system is of a flexible attach-

ment type (which uses tether belts to connect the child

restraint system properly to the lower anchorages)]

While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion,

pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure

the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack

in the belt.

4. Connect the top tether hook to the tether anchor-

age and firmly tighten the tether.

For information on how to set the top tether, read the

following “Top tether anchorages”.

5. Before seating a child in the child restraint system,

try to move seat back and forth and left and right to

verify that it is held securely in position.

6. To remove the child restraint system, follow the re-

verse procedures of installation.

If you have any question concerning this type of child

restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer.

Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top tether anchor-

ages so that a child restraint system having a top teth-

er can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a

child restraint system using top tether, proceed as fol-

UG1098BA US1113BA

1-48

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

lows, while observing the instructions by the child re-

straint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional stability by of-

fering another connection between a child restraint

system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use

a top tether whenever one is required or available.

Anchorage location

1) For left seat

2) For center seat

3) For right seat

HS1080BB

1-49

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Three upper anchorages are installed on the rear

edge of the roof.

Open the cover flaps to use the tether anchorages.

To hook the top tether

1. Remove the headrest at the seating position where

the child restraint system has been installed with the

lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift up the headrest while

pressing the release button. Store the headrest in the

cargo area. Avoid placing the headrest in the passen-

ger compartment to prevent it from being thrown

around in the passenger compartment in a sudden

stop or a sharp turn.

2. Open the cover flaps to use the anchorages. Fas-

ten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to

the appropriate top tether anchorage.

HS1081BA

US1593BA

1-50

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

3. Tighten the top tether securely.

Always remove the headrest when mounting a

child restraint system with a top tether. Other-

wise, it may not be possible to fasten the top

tether tightly.

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system.

This name is used because the airbag system supple-

ments the vehicle’s seatbelts.

Vehicle with driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS airbags and lap/shoulder re-

straints

Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint

system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front

seating position.

The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of

two airbag (driver’s and front passenger’s frontal air-

bags) or four airbags (driver’s and front passenger’s

frontal airbags and driver’s and front passenger’s

side airbags).

These SRS airbags are designed only as a supple-

ment to the primary protection provided by the

seatbelt.

To obtain maximum protection in the event of

an accident, the driver and all passengers in the

US1594BA

1-51

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the

vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed

only as a supplement to the primary protection

provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away

with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combina-

tion with the seatbelts, it offers the best com-

bined protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of

severe injury or death in a crash even when the

car has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions concerning

the seatbelt system, see the “Seatbelts” sec-

tions in this chapter.

Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the

SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed – faster than the blink

of an eye – and force to protect in high speed

collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an

occupant whose body is too close to SRS air-

bag.

It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help

avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air-

bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi-

tion such as one thrown forward during pre-ac-

cident braking.

Even when properly positioned, there remains

a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor

injury such as abrasions and bruises to the

face or arms because of the SRS airbag deploy-

ment force.

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable

speed and force. Occupants who are out of

proper position when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries. Because the

SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit upright and

well back in the seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

Do not place any objects over or near the

SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS

airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects

could interfere with its proper operation and

could be propelled inside the car and cause in-

jury.

1-52

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear

seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill children, espe-

cially if they are 12 years of age and under and

are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-

cause children are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater.

For that reason, we strongly recommend that

ALL children (including those in child seats and

those that have outgrown child restraint devic-

es) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at

all times in a child restraint device or in a seat-

belt, whichever is appropriate for the child’s

age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (in-

cluding forward facing child seats) in the REAR

seats at all times.

According to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in the rear seat-

ing positions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

For instructions and precautions concerning

the child restraint system, see the “Child re-

straint systems” section in this chapter.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING

CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE

CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on

the front passenger’s seat, or never hold a child

on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

HS1034BA

1-53

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke

will be released. This smoke could cause

breathing problems for people with a history of

asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or

your passengers have breathing problems after

SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.

A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Oc-

cupants could get burnt if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain

to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags

by alerting him to the applicable section in this

owner’s manual.

1-54

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

HS1083BB

1) Airbag control module (including

impact sensors)

2) Airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Airbag module (passenger’s

side)

4) Front sub sensor (left hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right hand

side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s

side if equipped)

7) Side airbag module (passen-

ger’s side if equipped)

8) Side airbag sensor (driver’s

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (passenger’s

side)

10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s

side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner (passen-

ger’s side)

1-55

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center

portion of the steering wheel. The passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard

under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the driver’s

and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy and

supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact on

the driver’s and front passenger’s head and chest.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE

TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on

the front passenger’s seat. The SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

HS1072BA

HS1070BA

1-56

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.

The SRS airbag deploys with considerable

force and can injure or even kill the child.

The SRS airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force. Occupants who are out of

proper position when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries. Because the

SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit upright and

well back in the seat as far from the steering

wheel as practical while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help

HS1069BA HS1084BA

1-57

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

avoid injuries that can result when the SRS air-

bag contacts an occupant not in proper posi-

tion such as one thrown toward the front of the

car during pre-accident braking.

Do not put any objects over the steering wheel

pad and dashboard. If the SRS frontal airbag

deploys, those objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be propelled inside

the vehicle and cause injury.

Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or

fit an extra-wide mirror over the rear view mir-

ror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects

could become projectiles that could seriously

injure vehicle occupants.

HS1085BA

HS1086BA

1-58

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Operation

A) Driver’s side

B) Passenger’s side

1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed.

HS1087BB

1-59

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

If the sensors detect a certain predetermined amount

of force during a frontal collision, the control module

sends signals to the frontal airbag modules instructing

them to inflate the SRS frontal airbags. Then both air-

bag modules produce gas, which instantly inflates

driver’s and passenger’s SRS frontal airbags. After the

deployment, the SRS airbags immediately start to de-

flate so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed. The

time required from detecting impact to the deflation of

the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the

blink of an eye.

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploys to-

gether with driver’s SRS frontal airbag even when no

one occupies the front passenger’s seat.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would

activate in a non-accident situation, should it occur,

the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vi-

sion and will not interfere with the driver’s ability to

maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud

inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be

released. These occurrences are normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the

vehicle.

Do not touch the SRS airbag system compo-

nents around the steering wheel and dash-

board with bare hands right after deployment.

Doing so can cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of deployment.

The SRS frontal airbag is designed to deploy in the

event of an accident involving a moderate to severe

frontal collision. It is basically not designed to deploy

in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary pro-

tection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, it

is basically not designed to deploy in side or rear im-

pacts or in roll-over accidents because deployment of

the SRS frontal airbag would not help the occupant in

those situations. The SRS airbag is designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compartment during a

collision. That level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the visible

damage done to the vehicle itself.

1-60

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

When will the SRS frontal airbag most likely de-

ploy?

A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a

vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or high-

er activates the SRS frontal airbag. The SRS frontal

airbag will also be activated when the vehicle is ex-

posed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magni-

tude to the above-mentioned collision.

At what other times might the SRS frontal air-

bag deploy?

The SRS frontal airbag may be activated when the ve-

hicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area

from the road surface (such as when the vehicle

HS1088BA

US1556BA

1-61

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

plunges into a deep ditch, is severely bumped or

knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as

a curb).

When is the SRS frontal airbag unlikely to de-

ploy?

There are many types of collisions which might not

necessarily require SRS frontal airbag deployment. If

the vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole

or sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load bed, or

if it sustains an oblique offset frontal impact, the SRS

frontal airbag may not deploy depending on the level

of accident forces involved.

US1557BA

1-62

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

When will the SRS frontal airbag not deploy?

The SRS frontal airbag is basically not designed to de-

ploy if the vehicle is struck from side or from behind, or

if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more

than once, the SRS frontal airbag deploys only once.

Example: In the case of a double collision, first with an-

other vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immedi-

ate succession, once the SRS frontal airbag is activat-

ed on the first impact, it will not be activated on the

second.

US1558BA

HS1104BB

1-63

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

SRS side airbag (if equipped)

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each

front seatback, which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS

side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle de-

ploys between the occupant and the door panel and

supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on

the occupant’s chest and head.

The SRS side airbag is designed as only a sup-

plement to the primary protection provided by

the seatbelt. It does not do away with the need

to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear

your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can re-

sult when an occupant is not seated in a proper

upright position.

Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either

front door. The SRS side airbag is stored in

both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and

it provides protection by deploying rapidly

(faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a

side impact collision. However, the force of

SRS side airbag deployment may cause injuries

if your head or other body parts are too close to

the SRS side airbag.

HS1092BA

1-64

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Do not rest your arm on either front door or its

internal trim. It could be injured in the event of

SRS side airbag deployment.

HS1093BA HS1094BA

HS1095BA

1-65

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Never allow a child to kneel on the front pas-

senger’s seat facing the side window or to wrap

his/her arms around the front seatback. In the

event of an accident, the force of the SRS side

airbag deployment could injure the child seri-

ously because his/her head or arms or other

body parts are too close to the SRS side airbag.

Since your vehicle is also equipped with a pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag, children aged 12

and under should be placed in the rear seat

anyway and should be properly restrained at all

times.

Do not attach accessories to the door trim or

near either SRS side airbags and do not place

objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event

of the SRS side airbag deployment, they could

be propelled dangerously toward the vehicle’s

occupants and cause injuries.

HS1096BA

1-66

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other

objects over either front seatback and do not

attach labels or stickers to the front seat sur-

face on or near the SRS side airbag. They could

prevent proper deployment of the SRS side air-

bag, reducing protection available to the front

seat’s occupant.

Operation

A) SRS side airbag deploys as soon as a collision oc-

curs.

B) SRS side airbag protects the front passenger’s head

HS1097BA

HS1098BB

1-67

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

and chest.

C) After deployment, SRS side airbag starts to deflate im-

mediately.

The SRS side airbag can function only when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” position.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS side airbags

deploy independently of each other since each has its

own impact sensor. Also, the SRS side airbag deploys

independently of the frontal airbags in the steering

wheel and instrument panel.

An impact sensor is incorporated into each of the ve-

hicle’s center pillars. If either sensor detects a certain

predetermined amount of force during a side impact

collision, the control module sends a signal to the side

airbag module on the impacted side of the vehicle, in-

structing it to inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the

side airbag module produces gas, which instantly in-

flates the SRS side airbag. After the deployment, the

SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The

time required from detecting impact to the deflation of

the SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than

the blink of an eye.

The SRS side airbag deploys even when no one occu-

pies the seat on the side on which an impact is ap-

plied.

When the SRS side airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly

loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will

be released. These occurrences are normal result of

the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in

the vehicle.

Do not touch the SRS side airbag system com-

ponents around the front seatback with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the components can be

very hot as a result of deployment.

The SRS side airbag is designed to deploy in the event

of an accident involving a moderate to severe side im-

pact collision. It is basically not designed to deploy in

lesser side impact. Also, it is basically not designed to

deploy in frontal or rear impacts because SRS side air-

bag deployment would not help the occupant in those

situations.

Each SRS side airbag is designed to function on a

one-time-only basis.

SRS side airbag deployment depends on the level of

force experienced in the passenger compartment dur-

ing a side impact collision. That level differs from one

1-68

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing

on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

When will the SRS side airbag most likely de-

ploy?

A severe side impact near the front seat activates the

SRS side airbag.

When is the SRS side airbag unlikely to deploy?

HS1099BA

1-69

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

US1568BB

1) The vehicle is involved in an ob-

lique side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicin-

ity of the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone

pole or similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or

roof.

1-70

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

There are many types of collisions which might not

necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In

the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS

side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of

accident forces involved.

When will the SRS side airbag not deploy?

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another

vehicle (moving or stationary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

US1569BB

1-71

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

The SRS side airbag is basically not designed to de-

ploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision or is

struck from behind. Examples of such accidents are il-

lustrated.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side

more than once, the SRS side airbag deploys only

once.

Example: In the case of a double side impact collision,

first with one vehicle and immediately followed by an-

other from the same direction, once the SRS side air-

bag is activated on the first impact, it will not be acti-

vated on the second.

SRS airbag system monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readi-

ness of the SRS airbag system while the vehicle is be-

ing driven. The SRS airbag system warning light “AIR-

BAG” will show normal system operation by lighting for

about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the

“ON” position.

The following components are monitored by the indi-

cator:

Front sub sensor (Right hand side)

Front sub sensor (Left hand side)

HS1102BB HS1103BA

1-72

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Airbag control module (including impact sensors)

Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

Frontal airbag module (Passenger’s side)

Side airbag sensor (Driver’s side)

Side airbag sensor (Passenger’s side)

Side airbag module (Driver’s side)

Side airbag module (Passenger’s side)

Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

Seatbelt pretensioner (Passenger’s side)

All related wiring

In the event of a malfunction indicated by any of follow-

ing, the vehicle should be taken promptly to your near-

est SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Un-

less checked and repaired, the SRS airbags will not

function reliably:

Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.

No illumination of the warning light when the ignition

switch is first turned to the “ON” position.

Continuous illumination of the warning light.

Illumination of the warning light while driving.

SRS airbag system servicing

When discarding an airbag module or scrap-

ping the entire car damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable

parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on

any circuit related to the SRS airbag system.

For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see

your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with

or disconnecting the system’s wiring could re-

sult in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or

could make the system inoperative, which may

result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of

the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow

insulation and system connectors are yellow

for easy identification.

If you need service or repair in areas listed be-

low, we recommend that you have an autho-

rized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The

SRS airbag control module, impact sensors

and airbag modules are stored in these areas.

Under the center console

Near the bottom of the radiator

Steering wheel and column and nearby areas

Top of the dashboard on front passenger’s

side and nearby areas

1-73

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

– CONTINUED –

Each front seat and nearby area (for vehicles

with SRS side airbags only)

Inside each center pillar

In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, re-

placement of the system should be performed

only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the

components of the SRS airbag system are re-

placed, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

To ensure their long-term reliability, the SRS airbags

must be inspected by a SUBARU dealer ten years af-

ter the date of manufacture, which is shown on the cer-

tification plate attached to the driver’s door jamb.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your SUBARU deal-

er as soon as possible.

The front part of the vehicle was involved in an

accident in which the SRS frontal airbags did not

deploy.

The pad section of the steering wheel or front

passenger’s frontal airbag cover is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with SRS

side airbags, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible in the following cases.

Either center pillar or a nearby area of the vehi-

cle was involved in an accident in which the SRS

side airbag did not deploy.

The fabric or leather of either front seatback is

cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged.

Precautions against vehicle modifica-

tion

To avoid accidental activation of the system

or rendering the system inoperative, which may

result in serious injury, no modifications

should be made to any components or wiring of

the SRS airbag system.

This includes following modifications:

Installation of custom steering wheels

Attachment of additional trim materials to

the dashboard

Installation of custom seats (for vehicles

with SRS side airbags only)

Replacement of seat fabric or leather (for

vehicles with SRS side airbags only)

Installation of additional fabric or leather

on the front seat (for vehicles with SRS side

airbags only)

1-74

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Installation of additional electrical/electronic

equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on

or near the SRS airbag system components

and/or wiring is not advisable. This could inter-

fere with proper operation of the SRS airbag

system.

Do not perform any of the following modifica-

tions. Such modifications can interfere with

proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

Attachment of any equipment (brush bar,

winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than

SUBARU genuine accessory parts to the front

end.

Modification of the suspension system or

front end structure.

Installation of a tire of different size and con-

struction from the tires specified on the tire

placard attached to the driver’s door jamb.

Attachment of any equipment (side steps or

side sill protectors, etc.) other than SUBARU

genuine accessory parts to the side body. (for

vehicles with side airbags only)

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to in-

stall any accessory parts to your vehicle.

2-1

Keys and doors

Keys ............................................................... 2-2

Key number ....................................................... 2-2

Door locks ..................................................... 2-3

Locking and unlocking from the outside ....... 2-3

Locking and unlocking from the inside .......... 2-4

Power door locking switches ...................... 2-5

Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) 2-6

Locking the doors ............................................. 2-7

Unlocking the doors ......................................... 2-7

Illuminated entry ............................................... 2-8

Vehicle finder function ..................................... 2-8

Sounding a panic alarm ................................... 2-8

Selecting audible signal operation ................. 2-8

Replacing the battery ....................................... 2-9

Replacing lost transmitters ............................. 2-10

Security system (if equipped) ...................... 2-14

System operation .............................................. 2-14

Arming the system ........................................... 2-14

Disarming the system ...................................... 2-16

Valet mode ......................................................... 2-17

Passive arming ................................................. 2-17

Child safety locks ......................................... 2-20

Windows ........................................................ 2-21

Power windows ................................................. 2-21

Rear gate ........................................................ 2-24

Moonroof (if equipped) ................................. 2-26

To open the moonroof ...................................... 2-26

To close the moonroof ..................................... 2-26

Anti-entrapment function ................................. 2-26

2-2

Keys and doors

Keys an d door s

Keys

1) Master key

2) Submaster key

3) Valet key

4) Key number plate

Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle:

Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your

vehicle.

Ignition switch

Driver’s door

Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch and driver’s

door lock. You can keep the glove box locked when

you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facil-

ity.

Do not attach a large key holder or key case to

either key. If it banged against your knees while

you were driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the ON position to the ACC or OFF

position, thereby stopping the engine.

Key number

The key number is stamped on the metal plate at-

tached to the key set. Write down the key number and

keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement key if you

lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle.

123

HS2011BB

2-3

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

Door locks

Locking and unlocking from the out-

side

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the

key toward the rear. To unlock the door, turn the key

toward the front (Driver’s side only).

Pull the outside door handle to open the unlocked

door.

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.

2) Close the door.

To lock the door from the outside without the key, ro-

tate the lock lever rearward and then close the door.

To lock the door from the outside using the power door

locking switch, push the front side of the switch

(“LOCK” side) and then close the door. In this case, all

closed doors and the rear gate are locked at the same

time.

Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are

locked before leaving your vehicle.

HS2012BB

2HS2013BB

2-4

Keys and doors

Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the

vehicle when locking the doors from the outside

without the key.

Locking and unlocking from the inside

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever

rearward. To unlock the door from the inside, rotate

the lock lever forward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door

is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are

closed before starting to drive.

Keep all doors locked when you drive, especial-

ly when small children are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat belts and

child restraints, locking the doors reduces the

chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers from falling

out if a door is accidentally opened, and intrud-

ers from unexpectedly opening doors and en-

tering your vehicle.

HS2014BB

2-5

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

Power door locking switches

1) Lock

2) Unlock

All doors and the rear gate can be locked and un-

locked by the power door locking switches located at

the driver’s side and the front passenger’s side doors.

To lock the doors, push the front side of the switch.

To unlock the doors, push the rear side of the switch.

When you close the doors after you set the door locks,

the doors remain locked.

Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the

vehicle before locking the doors from the outside

using power door locking switches.

HS2015BB

2-6

Keys and doors

Remote keyless entry system (if

equipped)

Two transmitters are provided for your vehicle.

The remote keyless entry system has the following

functions.

Locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate with-

out a key

Sounding a panic alarm

Arming and disarming the security system (if your

vehicle is equipped with an optional security system).

See the next section “Security system (if equipped)”

for detailed information.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper-

ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

The operable distance of the keyless entry system is

approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this dis-

tance will vary depending on environmental condi-

tions. Range may be reduced near sources of RF in-

terference such as power plants and radio/television

broadcasting towers.

The keyless entry system does not operate when the

key is inserted in the ignition switch to prevent acci-

dental lockout.

Do not expose the transmitter to severe

shocks, such as those experienced as a result

of dropping or throwing.

Do not take the transmitter apart except when

replacing the battery.

Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet,

wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.

2-7

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

A: LOCK/ARM button (Orange)

Press to Lock all doors.

Press and Hold to activate panic alarm.

Press three times in a five-second period to use vehi-

cle finder function.

B: UNLOCK/DISARM button (Blue)

1) Press once to Unlock driver’s door.

2) Press a second time to Unlock all other doors and

rear gate.

C: LED

Locking the doors

Briefly press the “LOCK/ARM” button (for less than

two seconds) to lock all doors and rear gate. An elec-

tronic chirp will sound one time and the turn signal

lights will flash one time.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed,

an electronic chirp will sound five times and the turn

signal lights will flash five times to alert you that the

doors or the rear gate are not properly closed. When

you close the door, it will automatically lock.

NOTE

If the “LOCK/ALARM” button is pressed for two

seconds or longer, the panic alarm will sound.

When locking the doors in normal circumstances,

press the “LOCK/ALARM” button for less than two

seconds. For details on the panic alarm, refer to

“Sounding a panic alarm”.

Unlocking the doors

Briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for less

than two seconds) to unlock the driver’s door. An elec-

tronic chirp will sound two times and the turn signal

lights will flash two times. To unlock all other doors and

rear gate, briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button

a second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and second press-

es of the "UNLOCK/DISARM" button (for unlock-

HS2016BB

2-8

Keys and doors

ing of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extreme-

ly short, the system may not respond.

Illuminated entry

The interior dome light and ignition switch light will illu-

minate when the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button is

pressed. These lights stay illuminated for approxi-

mately 30 seconds if any of the doors or the rear gate

is not opened.

If the “LOCK/ARM” button is pressed before 30 sec-

onds have elapsed, these lights will go out. Also, these

lights will go out if the key is inserted in the ignition

switch. The interior light must be set to the middle po-

sition in order for this function to operate.

Vehicle finder function

Use this function to find your vehicle parked among

many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are

within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the

“LOCK/ARM” button three times in a five-second peri-

od will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound one time

and its turn signal lights to flash three times.

Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, keep the “LOCK/ARM” button

pressed for more than two seconds.

The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash.

To deactivate it, press the “LOCK/ARM” button or

“UNLOCK/DISARM” button. Unless a button on the re-

mote is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after ap-

proximately 30 seconds.

Selecting audible signal operation

Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an

audible signal when the doors lock and unlock. If de-

sired, you may turn the audible signal off.

To turn the audible signal off, unlock the door by

pressing the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button and then si-

multaneously depress “LOCK/ARM” and “UNLOCK/

DISARM” buttons for more than two seconds. An elec-

tronic chirp will sound two times and the turn signal

lights will flash two times to inform you that the audible

signal has been turned off.

To turn the audible signal on, unlock the door by

pressing the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button and then si-

multaneously depress “LOCK/ARM” and “UNLOCK/

DISARM” buttons for more than two seconds. An elec-

tronic chirp will sound one time and the turn signal

lights will flash one time to inform you that the audible

signal has been turned on.

2-9

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter battery begins to get weak,

transmitter range will begin to decrease and the LED

will not illuminate. Replace the battery as soon as pos-

sible.

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the two screws on the back of the trans-

mitter case by using a phillips screwdriver.

2. Separate the case.

3. Remove the old battery from the holder.

1) Positive (+) side facing up

4. Replace with a new battery (Type CR2032 or

equivalent) making sure to install the new battery with

the positive (+) side facing up.

5. Install the back half of the transmitter case.

6. Reinstall the two screws on the back of the trans-

mitter case.

After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must

be synchronized with the keyless entry system’s

control unit. Press either the “LOCK/ARM” or “UN-

LOCK/DISARM” button six times to synchronize

the unit.

HS2017BA

HS2018BB

2-10

Keys and doors

Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the

transmitter when replacing the battery.

Be careful not to damage the printed circuit

board in the transmitter when replacing the bat-

tery.

Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional

transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you

should re-program all of your transmitters for security

reasons. It is recommended that you have your dealer

program all of your transmitters into your system.

Programming the transmitters

The keyless entry system is equipped with a special

code learning feature that allows you to program new

transmitter codes into the system or to delete old

ones. The system can learn up to four unique transmit-

ter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the

same or different.

To enter the programming mode:

1. Press “UNLOCK/DISARM” button to disarm the se-

curity system. (If your vehicle is equipped with the op-

tional security system.)

HS2016CA

2-11

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

2. Open the driver’s door and sit in the driver’s seat.

3. Close the driver’s door.

1) ON

2) LOCK

4. Place the ignition key into the ignition switch and

cycle the switch from LOCK to ON ten times within 15

seconds. Be sure to stop at the LOCK position. The

horn will sound once to indicate that you are in the

transmitter programming mode.

NOTE

You must finish the next step (opening the driver’s

door) within 45 seconds of starting this proce-

dures.

HS2019BB

HS2020BB

2-12

Keys and doors

To program the transmitters:

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. Close the driver’s door.

1) Press any button.

3. Press and release any button on the transmitter

that you wish to program into the system. The horn will

sound two times to indicate that the transmitter has

been programmed.

Any additional transmitters can also be programmed

at this time. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for an additional

transmitter.

To exit the programming mode:

1. After all of your transmitters are programmed, re-

move the key from the ignition switch.

The horn will sound three times to indicate that the

HS2019BC

HS2016DB

2-13

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

system has exited the programming mode.

2. Make sure that the keyless entry system properly

operates by operating each transmitter.

Deleting old transmitter codes

The control unit of the keyless entry system has four

memory locations to store transmitter codes, giving it

the ability to operate with up to four transmitters. When

you lose a transmitter, the lost transmitter’s code re-

mains in the memory. For security reasons, lost trans-

mitter codes should be deleted from the memory.

To delete old transmitter codes, program four trans-

mitter codes into the system. If you have only one cur-

rent transmitter, program it four times. If you have two

current transmitters, program each one twice. If you

have three current transmitters, program two of them

once and the third one twice. This process will leave

only current transmitter codes in the system’s memo-

ry.

NOTE

Make sure no one else is operating their keyless

entry system within range of your vehicle when

programming transmitters. If someone else were

to operate their remote transmitter while you are

programming your transmitters, it is possible that

their transmitter code will be programmed into

your system, allowing them unauthorized access

to your vehicle.

2-14

Keys and doors

Security system (if equipped)

The security system helps to protect your vehicle and

valuables from theft. The horn sounds and the turn

signal lights flash if someone attempts to break into

your vehicle. The starter motor is also interrupted to

prevent starting the vehicle without a key.

The system can be armed and disarmed with the re-

mote transmitter.

The system does not operate when the key is inserted

into the ignition switch.

System operation

The security system will give the following alarm indi-

cations when triggered:

The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will

sound intermittently. In addition, the starter motor will

not operate.

The alarm automatically resets after 30 seconds;

however, the alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tam-

pered with again. The alarm will continue for six times

if any sensor continues to be activated.

The alarm is triggered by:

Opening a door or the rear gate.

Application of physical shock to the vehicle (e.g.

breaking glass or forced entry). Note that there are two

alarm levels for shock: warning and alarm. In warning

mode, the alarm detects lower level vibrations and

triggers 2 warning chirps on the horn and two flashes

on the lights as a deterrent to would be vandals. In

alarm mode, higher levels of shock are detected and

the system will go into full alarm.

Ignition switch being turned on while in armed state.

NOTE

With the valet mode selected, the security system

does not operate when the remote transmitter is

used for locking and unlocking. The security sys-

tem indicator light in the combination meter flash-

es twice per second to show that the valet mode is

selected. For details, refer to “Valet mode” in this

section.

Arming the system

To arm the system using remote transmitter

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked.

5. Close all doors and the rear gate.

2-15

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

1) Press to Arm the system.

2) Press to Disarm the system.

Security system — indicator light

6. Briefly press the “LOCK/ARM” button (for less than

two seconds). All doors and the rear gate will lock, an

electronic chirp will sound one time, the turn signal

lights will flash one time and the indicator light starts

flashing slowly (approximately once every two sec-

onds).

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed,

an electronic chirp sounds five times, the turn signal

lights flash five times to alert you that the doors or the

rear gate are not properly closed. When you close the

door, the system will automatically arm and doors will

automatically lock.

HS2016EB HS2021BA

2-16

Keys and doors

To arm the system using power door locking

switches

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is locked.

5. Close the doors and the rear gate but leave only the

driver’s door or the front passenger’s door open.

6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of the power door

locking switch to set the door locks.

7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will sound one

time, the turn signal lights will flash one time and the

indicator light will start flashing slowly (approximately

once every two seconds) to inform you that the system

has armed.

NOTE

The system can be armed even if the engine hood,

the windows and/or moonroofs are opened. Al-

ways make sure that they are fully closed before

arming the system.

Disarming the system

Briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for less

than two seconds) on the remote transmitter. The driv-

er’s door will unlock, an electronic chirp will sound two

times, the turn signal lights will flash two times and the

indicator light will go off.

To unlock all other doors and the rear gate, briefly

press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button a second time.

Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter

(i.e. the transmitter is lost, broken or the transmitter

battery is too weak), you can disarm the system with-

out using the transmitter.

To disarm the system:

1. Unlock the door with the key and then open the

door.

2. The alarm will sound.

HS2013CB

2-17

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch and cycle it

from the “LOCK” to the “ON” position three (3) times

within 5 seconds.

Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the security system

does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmit-

ter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors

and rear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, open the driver’s door and

keep the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button depressed for

more than two seconds. The security system status

indicator light will continue to flash two times per sec-

ond indicating that the system is in the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, open the driver’s door and keep

the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button pressed for more

than two seconds. The indicator will stop flashing.

NOTE

If the remote transmitter is used to lock or unlock

the doors while the valet mode is selected, the

turn signal lights do not flash but an electronic

chirp is emitted.

Passive arming

When passive arming mode has been programmed by

the dealer, arming of the system is automatically ac-

complished without using the remote transmitter. Note

that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY

LOCKED.

To enter the passive mode

1. Remove the side sill cover on the driver’s side.

1)Open the driver’s door.

2)Remove the two clips fastening the front portion

of the cover with a screwdriver.

3)Remove the side sill cover by pulling it up.

HS2022BA

2-18

Keys and doors

1) Connector for SRS airbag system (yellow)

2) White (1P)

2. Connect the white (1 pole) connector.

3. Turn the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the

“ON” position.

4. Install the side sill cover.

To place the system in active arming mode (remote re-

quired for activation), disconnect the white connector.

Do not disconnect or tamper with any yellow

connector and/or any harness covered with yel-

low insulation and/or tape.

Doing so could result in accidental inflation of

the SRS airbag or could make the SRS airbag

system inoperative, which may result in serious

injury.

Arming the system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.

1) ON

2) LOCK

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to “LOCK” posi-

tion and remove the key from the ignition switch.

HS2023BB 1

HS2024BB

2-19

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the in-

side door lock levers.

5. Close the doors. The system will automatically arm

after one minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also be armed

with the remote transmitter or with the power door

locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power

door locking switch is used to lock the vehicle, arming

will take place immediately regardless of whether or

not the passive mode has been selected.

In passive mode, the system will automatically

activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically

lock the doors. In order to lock the doors you

must either lock them as indicated in step 4

above or with the key once they have been

closed. Failure to lock the doors manually will

result in a higher security risk.

Disarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the “UNLOCK/

DISARM” button on the transmitter.

Tripped sensor identification

If an electronic chirp sounds four times and the turn

signal lights flash four times when you disarm the sys-

tem, this indicates that the alarm was triggered. The

number of times the indicator light flashes indicates

what sensor caused the alarm condition.

To enter identification mode:

1. Open the driver’s door and leave it open.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position two

times. (“LOCK” → “ON” → “LOCK” → “ON” →

“LOCK”)

3. The indicator light will start flashing.

HS2013DB

2-20

Keys and doors

The indicator light provides the following indications.

Flashing one time: Any door or the rear gate has

been opened.

Flashing three times: The impact sensor in the sys-

tem’s unit has been activated. This may indicate that

your vehicle has been shocked or tampered with by

some outside force and/or unauthorized person.

Flashing four times: The ignition switch has been

turned on or the battery has been disconnected.

NOTE

The battery must be reconnected before the indi-

cator light will flash.

To exit this mode, close the door and turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.

Child safety locks

1) Lock

2) Unlock

Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents

the doors from being opened even if the inside door

handle is pulled.

When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position,

the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of

the position of the inner door handle lock lever. The

door can only be opened from the outside.

HS2025BB

2-21

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

Always use the child safety lock whenever a

child rides in the rear seat. Serious injury could

result if a child accidentally opened the door

and fell out.

Windows

Power windows

To avoid serious personal injury caused by en-

trapment, you must do the followings.

When operating the power windows, be ex-

tremely careful to prevent anyone’s fingers,

arms, neck or head from being caught in the

window.

Always lock the passengers’ windows using

the lock switch when children are riding in the

vehicle.

Before leaving the vehicle, always remove

the key from the ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child operating the

power window.

The power windows operate only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

2-22

Keys and doors

Driver’s side switches

1) Lock switch

2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto down fea-

ture)

3) For front passenger’s window

4) For rear left window

5) For rear right window

All door windows can be controlled by the power win-

dow switch cluster at the driver side door.

Operating the driver’s window

1) Open

2) Automatically open

3) Close

To open:

Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window

will open as long as the switch is held.

This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature

that allows the window to be opened fully without hold-

ing the switch.

Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and

the window will fully open. To stop the window half-

way, pull the switch up lightly.

HS2026BB

2HS2027BB

2-23

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

To close:

Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will

close as long as the switch is held.

Operating the passengers’ windows

To open the passengers’ windows, push the appropri-

ate switch down and hold it until the window reaches

the desired position.

To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until

it reaches the desired position.

Locking the passengers’ windows

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the passengers’ windows, push the lock

switch. When the lock switch is in the “LOCK” position,

the passengers’ windows cannot be opened or closed.

Passengers’ side switches

To open the window, push the switch down and hold it

until the window reaches the desired position.

To close the window, pull the switch up and hold it until

the window reaches the desired position.

When the lock switch on the power window switch

HS2027CA

US2510BB

2-24

Keys and doors

cluster, located on the driver’s side door, is in the

“LOCK” position, the passengers’ windows cannot be

operated with the passengers’ switches.

Rear gate

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using either

the keyless entry system or the power door locking

switches.

Refer to the “Power door locking switches” and “Re-

mote keyless entry system (if equipped)” sections in

this chapter.

To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock

then pull the outside handle up.

Then, hold the rear gate and raise it as high as it will

go.

HSB087CA

2-25

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down

firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull down

on the inside handle as shown in the illustration.

Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while

holding the inside handle. Also avoid closing

the rear gate by pulling on the inside handle

from inside the cargo space. There is a danger

of your hand being caught and injured.

To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from en-

tering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate

closed while driving.

Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane

tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo. That could

cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may

result in their inability to hold the rear gate

open.

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due to a dis-

charged battery, a fault in the door locking/unlock-

ing system or other causes, you can unlock it by

manually operating the rear gate lock release le-

ver.

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the rear

gate cannot be unlocked” in chapter 9 “In case of

emergency” .

HS2029BA

2-26

Keys and doors

Moonroof (if equipped)

1) Open/close switch

2) Open

3) Close

The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch

is in the “ON” position.

To open the moonroof

Push and quickly release the rear part of the switch to

open the moonroof. The sun shade also will be

opened together with the moonroof. The moonroof will

stop at a position 20 in. (50 cm) away from the fully

closed position. Push the switch again to open the

moonroof completely.

To stop the moonroof at a desired position, simply

push the opposite side of the switch.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away

water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to pre-

vent water drops from falling into the passenger com-

partment.

To close the moonroof

Push and quickly release the front part of the switch to

close the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a posi-

tion 8 in. (20 cm) away from the fully closed position.

Push the switch again to close the moonroof com-

pletely.

To stop the moonroof at a desired position, simply

push the opposite side of the switch.

Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses an object trapped be-

tween its glass and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back by 6 in. (15 cm) from that

point and then stops. The anti-entrapment function

may also be activated by a strong shock on the moon-

roof even when there is nothing trapped.

HS2030BB

2-27

Keys and doors

– CONTINUED –

For the sake of safety, it is recommended that

you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.

Driving with the moonroof fully open can cause

an annoying sound to generate at high speeds. If

such a condition has been encountered, use the

moonroof at the initial stop position of 20 in. (50

cm).

If the moonroof cannot be closed through

switch operation because of system failure, it can

be closed manually using a hex-head wrench. For

the procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the moon-

roof cannot be closed” in Chapter 9 “In case of

emergency”.

Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by

hand while the moonroof is closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves

back.

Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head or any

objects protrude from the moonroof. A person

could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops

suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is in-

volved in an accident.

HS2031BA

2-28

Keys and doors

To avoid serious personal injury caused by en-

trapment, you must do the followings:

Before closing the moonroof, make sure that

no one’s hands, arms, head or other objects

will be accidentally caught in the moonroof.

Before leaving the vehicle, always remove

the key from the ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child operating the

moonroof.

Never try to check the anti-entrapment func-

tion by deliberately placing part of your body in

the moonroof.

Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.

Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow

or extremely cold conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

3-1

Instruments and controls

Ignition switch .............................................. 3-2

LOCK .................................................................. 3-2

ACC .................................................................... 3-3

ON ....................................................................... 3-3

START ................................................................ 3-3

Key reminder chime .......................................... 3-3

Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) ........ 3-4

Hazard warning flasher ................................ 3-5

Meters and gauges ....................................... 3-5

Speedometer ..................................................... 3-5

Odometer/Trip meter ........................................ 3-5

Tachometer ........................................................ 3-6

Fuel gauge ......................................................... 3-7

Temperature gauge ........................................... 3-8

Ambient temperature gauge ............................ 3-9

Warning and indicator lights ....................... 3-10

Seatbelt warning light and chime .................... 3-10

SRS airbag system warning light .................... 3-10

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp ................................................. 3-11

Charge warning light ........................................ 3-12

Oil pressure warning light ................................ 3-12

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light

(for AT vehicles) ............................................. 3-12

ABS warning light ............................................. 3-12

Brake system warning light ............................. 3-13

Door open warning lights ................................. 3-15

Low fuel warning light ...................................... 3-15

Front-wheel drive warning light

(for AT vehicles) ............................................. 3-15

Shift position indicator (AT vehicles) ............. 3-15

Turn signal indicator lights .............................. 3-15

High beam indicator light ................................. 3-16

Cruise control indicator light ........................... 3-16

Clock .............................................................. 3-16

Light control switch ...................................... 3-17

Headlights ......................................................... 3-18

High/low beam change (dimmer) .................... 3-18

Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-19

Daytime running light system ......................... 3-19

Turn signal lever ........................................... 3-20

Illumination brightness control ................... 3-21

Parking light switch ...................................... 3-21

Fog light switch (if equipped) ...................... 3-22

Wiper and washer ......................................... 3-22

Windshield wiper and washer switches ......... 3-24

Rear window wiper and washer switch .......... 3-26

Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) ........ 3-27

Rear window defogger switch ..................... 3-28

Mirrors ............................................................ 3-29

Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-29

Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-32

Tilt steering wheel ......................................... 3-34

Horn ................................................................ 3-35

3-2

Instruments and controls

Ignition switch

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC,

ON and START.

LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed in this posi-

tion. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel

when you remove the key.

If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the right and left as you turn the key.

Automatic transmission vehicles

HS3014BA

HS3015BA

HS2020CA

3-3

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only

when the selector lever is in the “P” position.

Manual transmission vehicles

The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only

when the key is pushed in while turning it.

Never turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” while

the vehicle is being driven or towed because

that will lock the steering wheel, preventing

steering control. And when the engine is turned

off, it takes a much greater effort than usual to

steer.

ACC

In this position the electrical accessories (radio, ac-

cessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.

This is the normal operating position after the engine

is started.

START

The engine is started in this position. The starter

cranks the engine to start it. When the key is released

(after the engine has started), the key automatically

returns to the “ON” position.

Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position while the engine is running.

Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the driver’s door

HS2020DA

3-4

Instruments and controls

opens and the key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” positions.

The chime stops when the key is removed from the ig-

nition switch.

Key interlock release (AT vehicles

only)

If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK” position

even when the selector lever is in the “P” position:

1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.

2. Remove the cover under the steering column using

a phillips screwdriver.

3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the key inter-

lock release lever.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im-

mediately to have the key interlock system repaired.

HS3016BA

HS3017BA

3-5

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other driv-

ers when you have to park your vehicle under emer-

gency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works

with the ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the haz-

ard warning button on the instrument panel. To turn off

the flasher, push the button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn

signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.

Odometer/Trip meter

1) Trip meter

2) Odometer

This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or

“ON” position.

HS3019BA

2UG3026BB

3-6

Instruments and controls

Odometer

The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle

has been driven.

Double trip meter

1) A trip meter

2) B trip meter

The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has

been driven since you last set it to zero.

To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob.

Each press of the knob changes the function alter-

nately.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip

meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed

for more than 2 seconds.

To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the

function of the indicator during driving, as an

accident could result.

NOTE

If the connection between the combination meter

and battery is broken for any reason such as vehi-

cle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data re-

corded on the trip meter will be lost.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands

of revolutions per minute.

Do not operate the engine with the pointer of

the tachometer in the red zone. In this range,

UG3027AB

trip meter B trip meter

3-7

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

fuel injection will be cut by the engine control

module to protect the engine from overrevving.

The engine will resume running normally after

the engine speed is reduced below the red

zone.

Fuel gauge

1) Low fuel warning light

The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel

remaining in the tank.

The gauge does not return to “E” even though the ig-

nition switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning

or acceleration due to fuel level movement in the tank.

NOTE

You will see the “FUEL DOOR ” sign near the

fuel gauge.

This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is locat-

ed on the right side of the vehicle.

Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is

nearly empty [about 2.3 U.S. gal. (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp.

gal.]. It only operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

HS3022BB

HS3023AA

3-8

Instruments and controls

This light does not go out unless the tank is re-

plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about

4.0 U.S. gal. (15 liters, 3.3 Imp. gal.).

Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temper-

ature when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with

the outside temperature and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately until the

pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the

middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with

the engine coolant at this temperature range and high

revving operation when the engine is not warmed up

enough should be avoided.

If the pointer exceeds the normal operating

range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble.

See “In case of emergency” in chapter 9.

HS3024BB

3-9

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

Ambient temperature gauge

A: U.S. Spec. models

B: CANADA models

The ambient temperature gauge shows the ambient

temperature in a range from –22°F to 122°F (–30°C

to 50°C).

The gauge can give a false reading under any of the

following conditions:

When there is too much sun.

During idling; while running at low speeds in a traffic

jam; when the engine is restarted immediately follow-

ing a shutdown.

When the actual ambient temperature falls outside

the specified indicator range.

US3050BB

3-10

Instruments and controls

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights come on

momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch

is initially turned to the “ON” position. This permits

checking the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position. The following lights come on:

Seatbelt warning light

SRS airbag system warning light

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indica-

tor lamp

Charge warning light

Oil pressure warning light

AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles)

ABS warning light

Brake system warning light

If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out

bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

Seatbelt warning light and chime

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,

the seatbelt warning light will come on and the remind-

er chime will sound for about six seconds to remind the

driver to fasten the seatbelt.

The seatbelt warning light remains on for about six

seconds and turns off automatically after six seconds.

The seatbelt reminder chime will turn off when the

driver’s side seatbelt is buckled or it will turn off auto-

matically after six seconds.

SRS airbag system warning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,

the SRS airbag system warning light will come on for

about six seconds and go out. This shows the SRS air-

bag and SRS side airbag (if equipped) and seatbelt

pretensioners are in normal operation.

If this light comes on while driving or remains illuminat-

ed even after a period of about 6 seconds from when

the ignition has been turned on, it may indicate that the

SRS airbag system or SRS side airbag system (if

equipped) or seatbelt pretensioner system is not work-

ing properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

3-11

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator lamp

If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you

are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired

by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Continued vehicle operation without having the

emission control system checked and repaired

as necessary could cause serious damage,

which may not be covered by your vehicle’s

warranty.

If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine

is running, it may indicate that there is a problem or po-

tential problem somewhere in the emission control

system.

If the light comes on steadily:

If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not

go out after the engine starts, an emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by an autho-

rized SUBARU dealer immediately.

This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is

not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indica-

tor lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel fill-

er cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks.

Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the

cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK EN-

GINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take

several driving trips. If the light does not go out, take

your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer im-

mediately.

If the light is blinking:

If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire

condition has been detected which may damage the

emission control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emission control

system, you should do the following:

Reduce vehicle speed.

Avoid hard acceleration.

Avoid steep uphill grades.

Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.

Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking

3-12

Instruments and controls

and come on steadily after several driving trips. You

should have your vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on when the engine is running, it

may indicate that the charging system is not working

properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does not go out

after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe

opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the

light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU deal-

er immediately.

Oil pressure warning light

If this light comes on when the engine is running, it

may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the

lubricating system is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does not go out

after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe

opportunity and check the engine oil level. If the oil lev-

el is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at the

proper level but the light remains on, contact your

nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure

warning light on. This may cause serious en-

gine damage.

AT OIL TEMPerature warning

light (for AT vehicles)

If this light comes on when the engine is running, it

may indicate that the automatic transmission fluid tem-

perature is too hot.

If the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to

stop the vehicle, but avoid driving up steep grades or

in stop and go traffic.

Automatic transmission control system warn-

ing

If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indi-

cate that the automatic transmission control system is

not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer for service immediately.

ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition

(U.S.)

(Canada)

3-13

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after

about two seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system is working

properly.

If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS

system may not work properly.

When the warning light is on, the ABS function

shuts down; however, the conventional brake

system continues to operate normally.

The warning light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The warning light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, but it

does not go out even when the vehicle speed

exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

The warning light comes on during driving.

If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at

the first available opportunity by your SUBARU

dealer.

With a vehicle equipped with an EBD system, the ABS

warning light comes on together with the brake system

warning light if the EBD system becomes faulty. For

further details of the EBD system fault warning, refer

to “Brake system warning light”.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as described be-

low, the ABS system may be considered normal.

The warning light comes on right after the en-

gine is started but goes out immediately, remain-

ing off.

The warning light remains on after the engine

has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle

speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).

The warning light comes on during driving, but

it goes out immediately and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such

as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning

light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt-

age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the

battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.

Brake system warning light

Driving with the brake system warning light

on is dangerous. This indicates your brake sys-

tem may not be working properly. If the light re-

(U.S.)

(Canada)

3-14

Instruments and controls

mains on, have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are

operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

This light has the following three functions:

Parking brake warning

The light comes on with the parking brake applied

while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. It goes

out when the parking brake is fully released.

Brake fluid level warning

This light comes on when the brake fluid level has

dropped to near the “MIN” level of the brake fluid res-

ervoir with the ignition switch in the “ON” position and

with the parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should come on while

driving (with the parking brake fully released and with

the ignition switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads.

If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the near-

est safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the flu-

id level is below the “MIN” mark in the reservoir, do not

drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the near-

est SUBARU dealer for repair.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) sys-

tem warning (for vehicles with EBD)

The brake system warning light also illuminates if a

malfunction occurs in the EBD system. In that event, it

comes on together with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if the brake

system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate

simultaneously during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking

system will still function. However, the rear wheels will

be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied

harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may there-

fore become somewhat harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously, take the following

steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both warning lights go

out, the EBD system may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again and stay illu-

minated after the engine has been restarted, shut

down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and

3-15

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

check the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the “MIN” mark,

the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspect-

ed.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN” mark, DO

NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed

to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

Door open warning lights

The door open warning light comes on if any door or

the rear gate is not fully closed.

Always make sure this light is out before you start to

drive.

Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is

nearly empty about 2.3 U.S. gal. (9.0 liters, or 1.9 Imp.

gal.). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the tank is re-

plenished up to an internal fuel quantity of about

4.0 U.S. gal. (15 liters, 3.3 Imp. gal.).

Front-wheel drive warning light

(for AT vehicles)

This light comes on when All Wheel Drive is disen-

gaged and the drive mechanism is switched to Front

Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar purposes.

Shift position indicator (AT vehicles)

This indicator shows the position of the shift lever.

Turn signal indicator lights

These lights show the operation of the turn signal or

lane change signal.

UG3030AA

3-16

Instruments and controls

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the

turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb

as soon as possible. Refer to the “Replacing bulbs”

section in chapter 11.

High beam indicator light

This light shows that the headlights are in the high

beam mode.

This indicator light also comes on when the headlight

flasher is operated.

Cruise control indicator light

This light comes on when the “CRUISE” main switch

is pressed.

Clock

To adjust the clock, open the small article storage

compartment in the dashboard with the vehicle parked

in a safe place.

HS3025BA

3-17

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

To set the hour, press the “H” button. To set the min-

utes, press the “M” button. To reset the minutes to “00”

with a radio time signal, push the “Reset” button.

To ensure safety, do not attempt to set the time

while driving, as an accident from inadequate

attention to the road could result.

Light control switch

The light switch operates only when the ignition switch

is in the “ON” position.

To prevent battery discharge resulting from ac-

cidentally leaving your lights on when your ve-

hicle is parked, the light switch operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion. In any other position, the vehicle’s lights

will be out.

If you park your vehicle on a roadside at night,

use the hazard warning flasher to alert the other

drivers.

HS3018BA

3-18

Instruments and controls

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of

the turn signal lever.

first position:

Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights

and license plate light are on.

second position:

Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumina-

tion, tail lights, and license plate light are on.

High/low beam change (dimmer)

To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn

signal lever forward. When the headlights are on high

beam, the high beam indicator light “ ” on the in-

strument panel is also on.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the

detent position.

HS3026BA HS3026CA

3-19

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

Headlight flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and

then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long

as you hold the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the “OFF” posi-

tion.

When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam

indicator light “ ” on the instrument panel also

comes on.

Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for

more than just a few seconds.

Daytime running light system

The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker

lights are not turned on by the daytime running

light system. The light switch must always be

turned to the “ ” position when it is dark

outside.

The low beam headlights will automatically come on at

reduced brightness when the engine has started, un-

der the following conditions:

The parking brake is fully released.

The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ” position.

The automatic transmission selector lever is set at

other than the “P” position.

HS3026DA

3-20

Instruments and controls

Turn signal lever

1) Right turn

2) Left turn

3) Lane change for right

4) Lane change for left

To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal le-

ver up. To activate the left turn signal, push the turn

signal lever down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does not return af-

ter cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by

hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up

or down slightly and hold it during the lane change.

The turn signal indicator lights will flash in the direction

of the turn or lane change. The lever will return auto-

matically to the neutral position when you release it.

HS3027BB

3-21

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

Illumination brightness control

When the headlight switch is in the “ ” or “ ”

position, you can adjust brightness of the instrument

panel illumination for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

Parking light switch

The parking light switch operates regardless of the ig-

nition switch position.

By pushing the front end of this switch, following lights

will come on.

– Parking lights

– Tail lights

– License plate lights

To turn off, push the rear end of the parking light

switch.

Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because

that will run down the battery.

HS3028BA

HS3029BA

3-22

Instruments and controls

Fog light switch (if equipped)

The fog lights operate only when the headlights are on

low beam. Push the fog light switch to turn the fog

lights on.

Press the switch again to turn them off.

The indicator light located on the switch will illuminate

when the fog lights are on.

Wiper and washer

In freezing weather, do not use the windshield

washer until the windshield is sufficiently

warmed by the defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the

windshield, blocking your view.

Do not operate the washer continuously for

more than ten seconds, or when the washer flu-

id tank is empty. This may cause overheating of

the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level

frequently, such as at fuel stops.

Do not operate the wipers when the wind-

shield or rear window is dry. This may scratch

the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause

the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating

the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window,

always use the windshield washer.

In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper

blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear

window before switching on the wipers. At-

HS3030AA

3-23

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

tempting to operate the wiper with the blades

frozen to the window glass could cause not

only the wiper blades to be damaged but also

the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade

is frozen to the window glass, be sure to oper-

ate the defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped) or rear window defogger before turn-

ing on the wiper.

If the wipers stop during operation because

of ice or some other obstruction on the window,

the wiper motor could burn out even if the wiper

switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly

stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK” position and clean the

window glass to allow proper wiper operation.

Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is

unavailable. In areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

or the equivalent. (See the “Windshield washer

fluid” section in chapter 11.)

Also, when driving the vehicle when there are

freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type

wiper blades.

Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline

or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene.

This will cause deterioration of the wiper

blades.

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

Clean your wiper blades and window glass peri-

odically with a washer solution to prevent streak-

ing, and to remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Keep the washer button depressed at

least for 1 second so that washer solution will be

sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window.

Grease, wax, insects or other material on the

windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wip-

er operation and streaking on the glass. If you can-

not remove those streaks after operating the

washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the

outer surface of the windshield or rear window

and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth

with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner.

After cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper

blades with clean water. The glass is clean if no

beads form on the glass when you rinse with wa-

ter.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after

following this procedure, replace the wiper blades

with new ones. Refer to the “Replacement of wiper

3-24

Instruments and controls

blades” section (chapter 11) for replacement in-

structions.

Windshield wiper and washer switches

Windshield wipers

1) OFF

2) : Intermittent

3) LO: Low speed

4) HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever

down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the “OFF” po-

sition.

Wiper intermittent time control (if equipped)

When the wiper switch is in the “ ” position, turn

the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper.

The operating interval can be adjusted continuously

from the shortest interval to the longest.

Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim

at your desired interval.

4HS3031BB

HS3032BA

3-25

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

Mist (for a single wipe)

For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward

you. The wipers operate until you release the lever.

Washer

To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the

end of the wiper control lever. The washer fluid sprays

until you release the washer button. The wipers oper-

ate while you push the button.

HS3033BA HS3033CA

3-26

Instruments and controls

Rear window wiper and washer switch

1) INT

2) ON

3) Washer

Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of

the wiper control lever upward.

INT: Intermittent

ON: Normal

To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the

lever to the “OFF” position.

Washer

To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is oper-

ating, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control le-

ver counterclockwise to the “ ” position. The

washer fluid sprays until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in

use, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever

clockwise to the “ ” position. The washer fluid

sprays and the wiper operates until you release the

knob.

REAR

OFF

INT

HS3034BB

3-27

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Before turning on the windshield wiper deicer, remove

any snow from the windshield. To turn on the wind-

shield wiper deicer, push the switch. The indicator light

located on the switch lights up while the windshield

wiper deicer is operating.

The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off

after about 15 minutes. If the wiper blades have been

deiced completely before that time, push the switch to

turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If deicing is

not complete, you have to push the switch to turn the

deicer on again.

To prevent the battery from being discharged,

do not operate the windshield wiper deicer con-

tinuously for any longer than necessary.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with the outside mirror

defogger, the outside mirror defogger operates

while the windshield wiper deicer is operating.

HS3045AA

3-28

Instruments and controls

Rear window defogger switch

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system

The rear window defogger operates only when the ig-

nition switch is in the “ON” position.

The rear window defogger switch is located on the cli-

mate control panel.

The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15

minutes. If the window clears before that time, push

the switch to turn it off. It also turns off when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart

your vehicle, you have to push the switch to turn it on

again.

To turn on the defogger, push the switch. To turn it off,

HS4012DA

HS4021DA

3-29

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

push the switch again.

The indicator light located on the switch lights up while

the rear window defogger is operating.

Do not use sharp instruments or window

cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner

surface of the rear window. They may damage

the conductors printed on the window.

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not operate the defogger continu-

ously for any longer than necessary.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are

properly adjusted before you start driving.

Inside mirror

1) Tab

The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the

tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you for the night

position. Push it away for the day position. The night

position reduces glare from headlights.

1HS3036BB

3-30

Instruments and controls

Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)

1) Left button

2) Auto dimming indicator

3) Photosensor

4) Right button

The inside electronic compass mirror has an anti-glare

feature which automatically reduces glare coming

from headlights of vehicles behind you. It also con-

tains a built-in compass.

By pressing and releasing the left button, the auto-

matic dimming function is toggled on or off. When the

automatic dimming function is on, the auto dimming in-

dicator light (green) located to the right of the button

will illuminate.

By pressing and releasing the right button, the com-

pass display is toggled on or off. When the compass is

on, an illuminated compass reading will appear in the

lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror sur-

face turns bright if the transmission is shifted into re-

verse. This is to ensure good rearward visibility during

reversing.

Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the

front and back sides. If the glare from the headlights of

vehicles behind you strikes the mirror, these sensors

HS3037BB

HS3038BA

3-31

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

detect it and make the reflection surface of the mirror

dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For

this reason, use care not to cover the sensors with

stickers, or other similar items. Periodically wipe the

sensors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or

an applicator.

Compass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off all nonessential

electrical accessories (rear window defogger, heater/

air conditioning system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all

doors are shut.

2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metal-

lic objects or structures and make certain the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

3. Press and hold the left button for 3 seconds then re-

lease, and the compass will enter the calibration

mode. “CAL” and direction will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” disappears from

the display (about two or three circles).

5. The compass is now calibrated. Further calibration

is not required. The compass will automatically cali-

brate from this point forward.

Compass zone adjustment

Compass calibration zones

1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer

to the “Compass calibration zone” map shown above

or one attached to the end of this manual to verify that

the compass zone setting is correct for your geograph-

ical location.

2. Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then

release, and the word “ZONE” will briefly appear and

then the zone number will be displayed.

3. Press the right hand button repeatedly to cycle the

display through all possible zone settings. Stop cycling

when the correct zone setting for your location is dis-

HGF048AA

3-32

Instruments and controls

played.

4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the

zone setting mode.

Outside mirrors

Convex mirror (passenger side)

Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and far-

ther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do

not use the convex mirror to judge the distance

of vehicles behind you when changing lanes.

Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to

determine the actual size and distance of ob-

jects that you view in convex mirror.

Remote control mirror switch

1) Selection switch

2) Direction control switch

The remote control mirrors operate only when the ig-

nition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

1. Press either end of the selection switch, “L” for the

left, “R” for the right.

2. Move the direction control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

HS3040BA

MIRROR

HS3041BB

3-33

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

3. Return the selection switch to the neutral position

to prevent unintentional operation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.

Outside mirror defogger

1) Outside mirror defogger switch (if equipped)

2) Outside mirror defogger and Windshield wiper deicer

switch (if equipped)

The outside mirror defogger operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the

switch. To turn it off, push the switch again. The indi-

cator light located on the switch lights up while the out-

side mirror defogger is operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15

minutes. If the mirror clears before that time, push the

switch to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If de-

frosting or defogging is desired when you restart your

vehicle, you have to push the switch to turn it on again.

NOTE

On vehicles equipped with a windshield wiper de-

icer, the windshield wiper deicer switch is also

used to operate the outside mirror defogger.

To prevent the battery from being discharged,

do not operate the defogger continuously for

any longer than necessary.

HS3046AB

3-34

Instruments and controls

Tilt steering wheel

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the “Front seats”

section (chapter 1).

2. Push the tilt lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely

locked by moving it up and down.

Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position

while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle

control and result in personal injury.

HS3043BA

3-35

Instruments and controls

– CONTINUED –

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

HS3044BA

4-1

Climate control

Ventilator ....................................................... 4-2

Air flow selection .............................................. 4-2

Center and side ventilators .............................. 4-3

Manual climate control system .................... 4-4

Control panel ..................................................... 4-4

Heater operation ............................................... 4-6

Air conditioner operation (if equipped) .......... 4-9

Automatic climate control system

(if equipped) ............................................... 4-10

Temperature sensors ....................................... 4-16

Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner ................................................. 4-17

Cleaning ventilation grille ................................ 4-17

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ........................................................... 4-17

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit .............................................................. 4-17

Checking air conditioning system before

summer season .............................................. 4-17

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity

and low temperature weather conditions .... 4-18

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when

engine is heavily loaded ................................ 4-18

Refrigerant for your climate control system .. 4-18

Air filtration system (if equipped) ................ 4-18

Replacing an air filter ....................................... 4-19

4-2

Climate control

Clim ate contro l

Ventilator

Air flow selection

HS4008BA

4-3

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

Center and side ventilators

Center ventilators

Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the

flow direction.

Side ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the

flow direction.

To open or close the ventilator, turn the thumb-wheel

up or down.

HS4009BA

HS4010BB

4-4

Climate control

Manual climate control system

Control panel

1) Temperature control dial

2) Fan speed control dial

3) Air flow control dial

4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to the “Rear win-

dow defogger switch” in chapter 3.)

5) Air conditioner button (if equipped)

6) Air inlet selection button

Temperature control dial

This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the

air outlets over a range from the blue side (cool) to red

side (warm).

Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position. The fan speed control dial

is used to select four fan speeds.

Air flow control dial

This dial has the following five positions:

: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.

: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and

the foot outlets.

: Air flows through the foot outlets and some

through the windshield defroster outlets.

: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets

and foot outlets.

: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets.

NOTE

When the dial is placed in the “ ” or “ ” po-

sition, the air conditioner compressor operates

automatically regardless of the position of the air

conditioner button to defog the windshield quick-

ly. However the indicator on the air conditioner

HS4011BB

123

4-5

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

button will not come on. At the same time, the air

inlet selection is automatically set to “outside air”

mode.

In this state, you cannot select “recirculation”

mode by manually pressing the air inlet selection

button.

Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner com-

pressor by pressing the air conditioner button.

Air conditioner button (if equipped)

The air conditioner operates only when the engine is

running.

Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in op-

eration to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light

will come on.

Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.

Air inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculat-

ed inside the vehicle. Push the air inlet selection but-

ton to the ON position. The indicator light will come on.

Place the air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or when driving

on a dusty road.

OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is drawn into

the passenger compartment. Push the air inlet selec-

tion button again to the OFF position. The indicator

HS4012BA

HS4012CA

4-6

Climate control

light will go off.

Place the air inlet selection button to the OFF position

when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temper-

ature and the road is no longer dusty.

Continued operation with the air inlet selection

button in the ON position may fog up the win-

dows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as

the outside dusty condition clears.

Heater operation

Defrosting or defogging the windshield

To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win-

dows:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.

2. Turn the temperature control dial all the way to the

right.

3. Set the fan speed control dial to the highest speed.

If your vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner,

when the “ ” or “ ” position is selected, the air

conditioner compressor automatically operates re-

gardless of the position of the air conditioner button to

HS4013AA

4-7

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

defog the windshield quickly.

However, the air conditioner indicator light does not

come on at this time.

NOTE

Warm air also comes out from the right and left air

outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets,

turn the corresponding thumb-wheel down.

Heating and defrosting

To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”position.

2. Set the temperature control dial to the most com-

fortable level.

3. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.

If your vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner,

when the “ ” or “ ” position is selected, the air

conditioner compressor automatically operates re-

gardless of the position of the air conditioner button to

defog the windshield quickly.

However, the air conditioner indicator light does not

come on at this time.

NOTE

Warm air also comes out from the right and left air

outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets,

turn the corresponding thumb-wheel down.

Heating

To direct warm air toward the floor:

HS4014AA

HS4015AA

4-8

Climate control

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF position

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the most com-

fortable level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.

NOTE

Warm air also comes out from the right and left air

outlets. To stop warm air flow from these outlets,

turn the corresponding thumb-wheel down.

Bi-level heating

This setting allows you to direct air of different temper-

atures from the instrument panel and foot outlets. The

air from the foot outlets is slightly warmer than from the

instrument panel outlets.

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired tem-

perature level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.

Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the

red area or blue area decreases the temperature dif-

ference between the air from the instrument panel out-

lets and the air from the foot outlets.

Ventilation

HS4016AA

HS4017AA

4-9

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

To force outside air through the instrument panel out-

lets:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.

3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.

When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet selection

button to the “ON” position.

Continued operation with the air inlet selection

button in the ON position may fog up the win-

dows. Switch to the OFF position as soon as

the outside dusty condition clears.

Air conditioner operation (if equipped)

Cooling or dehumidifying

1) ON position

For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger

compartment, performing the following steps will allow

air to flow through the instrument panel outlets:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.

3. Set the air conditioner button to the “ON” position.

4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue side.

5. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.

HS4018BB

4-10

Climate control

Defrosting or defogging

To direct warm air to the windshield and front door win-

dows:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.

2. Set the temperature control dial to the red side.

3. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.

The air conditioner compressor automatically oper-

ates when the air flow control dial set in the “ ” or

“ ” position to provide better defogging perfor-

mance.

However, the air conditioner indicator light does not

come on at this time.

Automatic climate control system (if

equipped)

Operate the automatic climate control system

when the engine is running.

When the engine coolant is cold, the blower

does not run.

In the “AUTO” mode, when the air temperature

in the passenger compartment is sufficiently cool,

the air conditioner compressor does not operate.

For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold

weather, press the “A/C” switch on.

Even when cooling is not necessary, setting the

temperature much lower than the current outlet air

temperature turns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the “A/C” indicator light on

the control panel comes on.

The automatic climate control system automatically

controls outlet air temperature, fan speed, air flow dis-

tribution air-inlet control, and air conditioner compres-

sor operation. It activates when the “AUTO” switch is

pressed, and is used in conjunction with the Temper-

ature control dial to maintain a constant, comfortable

climate within the passenger compartment.

The temperature can be set within a range of 65° –

HS4013AA

4-11

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

85°F (18° – 32°C).

NOTE

The temperature is shown in units of Fahrenheit

for the US model and in Centigrade for the Canadi-

an model.

Control panel

1) Temperature control dial

2) AUTO switch

3) Fan speed control dial

4) Air conditioner switch

5) Air flow control dial

6) Defroster switch

7) Rear window defogger switch (Refer to the “Rear win-

dow defogger switch” in chapter 3.)

8) Air inlet selection switch

9) OFF/BRIGHT switch

AUTO switch

AUTO mode operation:

When the “AUTO” switch is pressed, the indicator light

on the switch illuminates, indicating that the Automatic

Climate Control system is operating in the automatic

mode. In the automatic mode, the system maintains

the desired cabin air temperature (this is set using the

temperature control dial) by automatically controlling

the fan speed, air flow mode, air inlet selection, and air

conditioner compressor operation.

123456

789 US4032BB

US4031BA

4-12

Climate control

Manual mode operation:

If you operate any of the switches and dials on the

control panel other than the “OFF” switch and temper-

ature control dial during automatic mode operation,

the indicator light on the “AUTO” switch goes out. You

can then manually control the system as desired using

the switch or dial you operated.

To change the system back to the AUTO mode, press

the “AUTO” switch.

OFF switch

The Automatic Climate Control system turns off (the

air conditioner compressor and fan turn off) when the

“OFF” switch is pressed.

When the “OFF” switch is pressed, the outside air in-

troduction mode (air inlet selection OFF) is automati-

cally selected.

NOTE

Display illumination dimness cancellation

(BRIGHT):

Setting the light switch to the “ ” or “ ”

position causes the illumination on the display

panel to dim. When traveling with the lights on in

gloomy daylight or in twilight, press the OFF

switch for 1 second or longer if you feel it is too

hard to identify the illumination clearly. The bright-

ness comes back to normal.

If you wish to dim the illumination again, hold

down the OFF switch again or if you can safely do

so, turn the light switch OFF and then place it in

the “ ” or “ ” position.

Temperature control dial

This dial is used to set the desired interior tempera-

ture. With the dial set to your desired temperature, the

system automatically adjusts the temperature of air

supplied from the outlets such that the desired temper-

ature is achieved and maintained.

If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, the system

gives maximum cooling performance. If the dial is

turned fully clockwise, the system gives maximum

heating performance.

NOTE

The temperature is shown in units of Fahrenheit

for the US model and in Centigrade for the Canadi-

an model.

4-13

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

— Defroster switch

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield and side win-

dows, push the defroster switch “ ”. When the

“ ” switch is pushed, regardless whether the air

conditioner is operating or not, outside air is drawn into

the passenger compartment, the air conditioner com-

pressor turns on, air flow is directed towards the wind-

shield and side windows, and the indicator light on the

switch comes on.

After eliminating the fogging from the windshield, re-

turn the climate control system to the AUTO mode by

pushing the “AUTO” switch or turn off by pushing the

“OFF” switch.

Alternatively, push the “ ” switch again to return

the system to the setting that was selected before you

activated the defroster.

Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position. Select any of the four fan speeds by

turning the fan speed control dial. The selected fan

speed is indicated by illumination of the corresponding

indicator light around the dial.

HS4021CA

HS4020AA

4-14

Climate control

A/C — Air conditioner switch

If the windshield starts to fog when the climate control

system is operated in the AUTO mode, push the air

conditioner switch “A/C” to defog and dehumidify.

When this switch is pushed, the air conditioner com-

pressor turns on and the indicator light comes on. Af-

ter eliminating the fogging from the windshield, set the

system back to the AUTO mode by pushing the “AU-

TO” switch.

NOTE

The air conditioner compressor does not operate

when the outside air temperature is below 32°F

(0°C).

Air flow control dial

Select the desired air flow mode by turning the air flow

control dial. The selected air flow mode is indicated by

illumination of the corresponding indicator light around

the dial.

(Ventilation): Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets.

(Bi-level): Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets and the foot outlets.

(Heat): Air flows through the foot outlets and some

through the windshield defroster outlets.

HS4020DA HS4021AA

4-15

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

(Heat-def): Air flows through the windshield de-

froster outlets and foot outlets.

Air inlet selection switch

Select air flow by pushing the air inlet selection switch

“”.

ON (Recirculation): Interior air recirculates inside the

passenger compartment. Push the air inlet selection

button to the ON position for fast cooling with the air

conditioner or when driving on a dusty road. The indi-

cator light comes on when the “Recirculation” mode is

selected.

OFF (Outside air): Outside air is drawn into the pas-

senger compartment. Push the air inlet selection but-

ton to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to

a comfortable temperature and the road is no longer

dusty. When the climate control system is operated in

the “AUTO” mode, this position is selected automati-

cally. The indicator light goes off when the “Outside

air” mode is selected.

Continued operation in the ON position may fog

up the windows. Switch to the OFF position as

soon as the outside dusty condition clears.

HS4020CA

4-16

Climate control

Temperature sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system employs several

sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are not

treated properly and become damaged, the system

may not be able to control the interior temperature cor-

rectly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the

following precautions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows:

– Solar sensor: beside the windshield defroster grille

– Interior air temperature sensor: near the steering

column

– Ambient temperature sensor: behind the front grille.

HS4028BB

4-17

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

Operating tips for heater and air con-

ditioner

Cleaning ventilation grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille free of

snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient

heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located

in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired by any ac-

cumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows

open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate

into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling

by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during

the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cool-

ing efficiency.

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrig-

erant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low en-

gine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few min-

utes each month during the off-season to circulate its

oil.

Checking air conditioning system be-

fore summer season

Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks,

hose conditions, and proper operation each spring.

This check is best performed by your SUBARU dealer.

HS4022CA

4-18

Climate control

Cooling and dehumidifying in high hu-

midity and low temperature weather

conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high relative humid-

ity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water

vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed.

This condition is normal and does not indicate any

problem with the air conditioning system.

Air conditioner compressor shut-off

when engine is heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air con-

ditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off

during air conditioner operation whenever the acceler-

ator is fully depressed such as during rapid accerela-

tion or when driving on a steep upgrade.

Refrigerant for your climate control

system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant

HFC134a. Therefore, the method of adding, changing

or checking the refrigerant is different from the method

for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for

service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong

refrigerant are not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system (if equipped)

If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is equipped

with an air filtration system, replace the filter element

according to the replacement schedule shown below.

This schedule should be followed to maintain the fil-

ter’s dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty con-

ditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. It

is recommended that you have your filter checked or

replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement,

use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:

Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichev-

er comes first

4-19

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

Replacing an air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

1)Open the glove box.

2)Remove the nine screws securing the glove box.

1) Air filter cover

2. Remove the air filter cover.

HS4024BA

1HS4025BB

4-20

Climate control

1) Air filter element

2) Arrow mark

3. Replace the air filter element with new one.

The arrow mark on the filter must point UP.

1) Air filter cover

4. Reinstall the air filter cover.

12HS4026BB 1HS4025CB

4-21

Climate control

– CONTINUED –

5. Reinstall the glove box.

6. Close the glove box.

1) Service label

2) Caution label

7. LABEL installation

1)Fill out the information on the service label

(small).

2)Attach service and caution labels on the door pil-

lar on the driver’s side.

Contact your dealer if the following occurs,

even if it is not yet time to change the filter:

– Reduction of the air flow through the vents.

HS4024BA

HS4027BB

4-22

Climate control

– Windshield gets easily fogged or misted.

The filter can influence the air conditioning, heat-

ing and defroster performance if not properly

maintained.

5-1

Audio

Antenna system ............................................ 5-2

FM reception ..................................................... 5-2

Installation of accessories ........................... 5-3

Audio set ........................................................ 5-3

Type A audio set ............................................... 5-3

Type B audio set ............................................... 5-4

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio

unit – if equipped) .......................................... 5-4

Type A audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-5

Radio operation ................................................ 5-5

Compact disc player operation ....................... 5-10

CD changer control (If optional in-dash CD

changer is connected) ................................... 5-13

Type B audio set (if equipped) ..................... 5-16

Radio operation ................................................ 5-16

Built-in CD changer operation ......................... 5-22

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped) .... 5-27

Loading and unloading compact discs .......... 5-27

Precautions to observe when handling

a compact disc (CD) .................................. 5-30

5-2

Audio

Antenna system

The antenna is printed on the inside of the left side

rear quarter window glass.

Do not use sharp instruments or window clean-

er containing abrasives to clean the inner sur-

face of the window on which the antenna is

printed. Doing so may damage the antenna

printed on the window.

FM reception

Although FM is normally static free, reception can be

affected by the surrounding area, atmospheric condi-

tions, station strength and transmitter distance. Build-

ings or other obstructions may cause momentary stat-

ic, flutter or station interference. If reception continues

to be unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

HS5008BA

5-3

Audio

– CONTINUED –

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing

a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in

your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic

control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly in-

stalled or if they are not suited for the vehicle.

Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the fol-

lowing audio sets. See the pages indicated in this sec-

tion for operating details.

Type A audio set

Radio operation: refer to page 5-5

Compact disc player operation: refer to page 5-10

CD changer control: refer to page 5-13

HS5009AA

5-4

Audio

Type B audio set

Radio operation: refer to page 5-16

Built-in CD changer operation: refer to page 5-22

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional

audio unit – if equipped)

Inserting and removing a disc or all discs: refer to

page 5-27

US5020AA

HG5021AA

5-5

Audio

– CONTINUED –

Type A audio set (if equipped)

The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

Radio operation

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

HS5012BB

(1) Power switch, Volume control,

Tone/Fader/Balance control dial

(2) BAND button

(3) Tuning buttons

(4) Preset buttons

(5) AUDIO button

(6) SCAN button

5-6

Audio

Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/

balance control (PWR/VOL)

The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and vol-

ume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by push-

ing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial.

Tone and balance control

The “VOLUME” control knob normally function as vol-

ume control. This knob become a control for Treble,

Bass, Fader or Balance when you select the appropri-

ate audio mode.

Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning

the “VOLUME” control knob. The control function re-

turns to volume control mode after about 5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief press of the

“AUDIO” button changes control modes in the follow-

ing sequence starting from volume control mode.

(When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is

in the volume control.)

Volume

(VOL)

Bass

(BAS)

Treble

(TRE)

Balance

(BAL)

Fader

(FAD)

5-7

Audio

– CONTINUED –

Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

BAS Bass control For less bass For more bass

TRE Treble control For less treble For more treble

BAL Balance control To increase left speaker volume and

decrease right speaker volume

To increase right speaker volume and

decrease left speaker volume

FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and

decrease front speaker volume

To increase front speaker volume and

decrease rear speaker volume

VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume

HS5014BA

5-8

Audio

FM/AM/Weather band selection button (BAND)

Push the “BAND” button when the radio is on to select

FM1, FM2, AM or Weather band (WB) reception. Each

time this button is pressed, the band will change in the

following order:

The display indicates which one is currently selected.

Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM

stereo broadcast is received.

Tuning (TUNE)

Manual tuning (TUNE)

Push the tuning button (3) marked “ ” to increase

the tuning frequency and press the tuning button

marked “ ” to decrease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the frequency chang-

es 10 KHz in the AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM

waveband.

Manual tuning for weather band

When weather band mode is selected, press the tun-

ing button (3) marked “ ” to change the WB chan-

nel up and press the tuning button marked “ ” to

change the WB channel down. Each time the button is

pressed, the WB channel changes to the next chan-

nel.

Seek tuning

If the tuning button (3) is pressed for longer than half

of a second, the radio will begin to automatically

search for receivable frequencies and will stop at the

first one found. This function may not be available,

however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situ-

ation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta-

tion.

Automatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (6) to change the radio to the

SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the

radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop

at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-

quency, after which scanning will continue until the en-

tire band has been scanned from the low end to the

high end.

Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN

mode and to stop on any displayed frequency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tun-

ing, stations are scanned in the direction of low fre-

quencies to high frequencies only.

FM1 FM2 AM

5-9

Audio

– CONTINUED –

Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta-

tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta-

tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.

Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button (4) allows you

to select that station in a single operation. Up to six

WB, AM, FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset.

How to preset stations

1. Press the “BAND” selection button to select AM,

FM1, FM2 or WB reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (6) or tune the radio man-

ually until the desired station frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (4) for at least 2

seconds to store the frequency. At this time, there will

momentarily be no sound from the radio. If the button

is pressed for less than 2 seconds, the preceding se-

lection will remain in memory.

NOTE

If the connection between the radio and battery

is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte-

nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec-

essary to reset the preset buttons.

If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it

may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives

calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.

5-10

Audio

Compact disc player operation

(15) (7) (8) (9)

(10)(11)

(12)

(13)(14)

HS5012CB

(7) Disc slot

(8) CD button

(9) Eject button

(10) Fast forward and track up button

(11) Fast reverse and track down

button

(12) Random button

(13) Repeat button

(14) Scan button

(15) PWR (power) switch

5-11

Audio

– CONTINUED –

To play back a compact disc

When CD is not in the player

Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while grip-

ping the edge of the disc, then insert it in to the slot

(with the label side up) and the player will automatical-

ly pull the disc into position.

A single CD (8 cm/3 inch CD) may also be used with-

out any adapter.

NOTE

Make sure to always insert a disc with the label

side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side

down, it might be ejected or the player might shut

off.

After the last song finishes, the player will auto-

matically return to track 1 (the first song on the

disc).

When CD is in the player

Press the “CD” button (8). The display will show “CD”

and the player will start playback.

NOTE

After the last song finishes, playback will automat-

ically return to track 1 (the first song on the disc).

To stop playback of a CD

When the “PWR” button (15) is pressed during play-

back of a CD, the CD stops playing temporarily. To let

the CD resume playing, press the button again.

To select a song from its beginning

Forward direction

Briefly press the “ ” button (10) to skip to the be-

ginning of the next track. Each time the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will increase.

Backward direction

Briefly press the “ ” button (11) to skip to the be-

ginning of the current track. Each time the button is

pressed, the indicated truck number will decrease.

Fast forwarding and fast reverse

Fast forwarding

Press the “ ” button (10) continuously for more

than 1 second to fast forward the disc.

Release the button to stop fast forwarding.

Fast reverse

Press the “ ” button (11) continuously for more

than 1 second to fast reverse the disc.

Release the button to stop fast reverse.

Repeat playback

Press the “RPT” button (13) and release it in less than

5-12

Audio

2 seconds while a song is playing to play the song re-

peatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the

song will be played continuously. To cancel the repeat

mode, press the button again. Then the “RPT” indica-

tor goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.

Random playback

Press the “RAND” button (12) and hold it in for more

than 2 seconds while a disc is being played back to

play all songs on the disc in a random order. The

“RAND” indicator will come on and all songs on the

disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel the random mode, press the button again.

Then the “RAND” indicator goes out, and normal play-

back mode is restored.

Scan

Press the “SCAN” button (14) and release it in less

than 2 seconds, and you can hear the first 10 seconds

of each track to search for the desired program. To

continue listening to the program, press the “SCAN”

button again. After all tracks on the disc has been

scanned, normal playback mode is restored.

To eject a disc from the player

When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in

the player, press the eject button “ ” (7). The disc

will be ejected.

The disc may be removed even when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” position.

NOTE

Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,

because vibration might make it fall out.

To protect the disc, the disc is automatically

loaded if it is left in the ejected position for more

than approximately 15 seconds (Auto Reload). In

this case, the disc is not played.

5-13

Audio

– CONTINUED –

CD changer control (If optional in-dash CD changer is

connected)

An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. Consult the

instructions that accompany the CD changer for operating the CD changer

itself (e.g., how to load or unload CDs). See your SUBARU dealer for more

information.

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

HS5012DB

(16) CD button

(17) Track selection buttons

(18) RAND (Random) button

(19) RPT (Repeat) button

(20) SCAN button

5-14

Audio

To start playback

When the “CD” button (16) is pressed, the CD changer

will start playback. The display shows the current disc

number, track number and the elapsed time during

playback.

NOTE

If a disc is in the player, the “DISC” button is

used to change from CD player operation to DISC

changer operation. Each time the “DISC” button is

pressed, the operating mode will change alter-

nately.

At the end of the disc, the player automatically

continues with the next disc.

After playback on the last disc finishes, play-

back will automatically return to the first disc.

If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any miss-

ing disc is automatically skipped.

Selection of a desired disc

You can select a desired disc from among the discs

contained in the CD changer only by pressing the cor-

responding number on one of the disc select buttons.

If you are to listen to the 5th disc in the CD changer,

press the “5” button of the disc select buttons. All other

discs in the CD changer can also be selected in a sim-

ilar way.

No disc change takes place if the button corre-

sponding to the storage tray in which no disc is

loaded is pressed.

If the disc select button corresponding to the

disc now in playback is pressed again, the disc

will be replayed from its beginning.

To select a song from its beginning

Forward direction

Briefly press the “ ” button (17) to skip to the be-

ginning of the next track. Each time the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will increase.

Backward direction

Briefly press the “ ” button (17) to skip to the be-

ginning of the current track. Each time the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will decrease.

Fast forwarding and fast reverse

Fast forwarding

Press the “ ” button (17) continuously for more

than 1 second to fast forward the disc.

Release the button to stop fast forwarding.

If you continue fast forwarding to the end of the disc,

the CD changer will automatically stop fast forwarding

and start playback beginning with the first track on the

5-15

Audio

– CONTINUED –

current disc.

Fast reverse

Press the “ ” button (17) continuously for more

than 1 second to fast reverse the disc.

Release the button to stop fast reverse.

If you continue fast reverse to the beginning of the

disc, the CD changer will automatically stop fast re-

verse and start playback beginning with the first track

on the current disc.

Repeat

Press the “RPT” button (19) while a song is playing to

play the song repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will

come on and the song will be played continuously. To

cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then

the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback

mode is restored.

Random playback

Press the “RAND” button (18) while a disc is being

played back to play all songs on the disc in a random

order. The “RAND” indicator will come on and all

songs on the disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel the random mode, press the button again.

Then the “RAND” indicator goes out, and normal play-

back mode is restored.

Scan (a convenient way to become familiar with

a disc)

1. Press the “SCAN” button (20).

– The display shows “SCAN” and the track number

being scanned.

– You hear the first 10 seconds of each track.

– The operation is automatically cleared after play-

ing all programs. Then, normal playback starts.

2. Press the “SCAN” button again when you hear a

track you like.

– Normal playback resumes.

To stop playback

To stop playback and switch over to the radio mode,

press the “BAND” button.

5-16

Audio

Type B audio set (if equipped)

The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

Radio operation

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(7)(8) US5021BB

(1) SCAN button

(2) FM/AM selection button

(3) WB (weather band) button

(4) Power switch, Volume control,

Bass/Middle/Treble control and

Fader/Balance control dial

(5) TONE button

(6) Fader/Balance selection button

(7) Preset buttons

(8) Tuning buttons

5-17

Audio

– CONTINUED –

Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/

balance control (PWR/VOL)

The dial (4) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and vol-

ume control. The radio is turned ON and OFF by push-

ing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial.

This dial is used for bass/middle/treble controls when

the “TONE” button (5) is in the depressed position. It

is also used for fader/balance controls when the “BAL”

button (6) is in the depressed position.

5-18

Audio

Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

BASS Bass control For less bass For more bass

MIDDLE Middle note control For less middle note For more middle note

TREBLE Treble control For less treble For more treble

FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and

decrease front speaker volume

To increase front speaker volume and

decrease rear speaker volume

BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker volume and

decrease right speaker volume

To increase right speaker volume and

decrease left speaker volume

VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume

HS5014BA

5-19

Audio

– CONTINUED –

Tone control

The volume control dial (4) normally function as vol-

ume control. The dial become a control for Bass, Mid-

dle note or Treble when you select the appropriate

tone control mode.

Choose desired level for each mode by turning the vol-

ume control dial. The control function returns to vol-

ume control mode after about 5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief press of the

“TONE” button (5) changes control modes in the fol-

lowing sequence starting from bass control mode.

(When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is

in the volume control.)

Fader and balance control

The volume control dial (4) normally function as vol-

ume control. The dial become the controls for Fader or

Balance when you select the appropriate fader and

balance control mode.

Choose desired setting for each mode by turning the

volume control dial. The control function returns to vol-

ume control mode after about 5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief press of the

“BAL” button (6) changes control modes in the follow-

ing sequence starting from fader control mode. (When

the radio is turned on, the control mode is in the vol-

ume control.)

Display illumination dimness cancellation

(BRIGHT)

The brightness of the radio display dims when the light

switch is in the “ ” or “ ” positions. If this

makes the display difficult to read, press the volume

dial for more than 1.5 seconds to return the display to

original brightness.

Subsequently pressing the volume dial again for more

than 1.5 seconds or if you can safely do so, turning the

light switch to the OFF position and back to the

“ ” or “ ” position makes the radio display

dim again.

FM/AM selection button (FM/AM)

Push the “FM/AM” button (2) when the radio is off to

turn on the radio.

Push the “FM/AM” button when the radio is on to se-

lect FM1, FM2 or AM reception. Each time this button

is pressed, the band will change in the following order:

VOLUMEBASS TREBLEMIDDLE

FADER BALANCE VOLUME

5-20

Audio

The display indicates which one is currently selected.

Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM

stereo broadcast is received.

Weather band button (WB)

Push the “WB” button (3) when the radio is off to turn

on the radio in the weather band.

Press the “WB” button when the radio is on to select

the weather band.

Manual tuning (TUNE)

Manual tuning for AM and FM waveband

Push the tuning button (8) marked “ ” to increase

the tuning frequency and press the tuning button

marked “ ” to decrease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the frequency chang-

es 10 KHz in the AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM

waveband.

Manual tuning for weather band

When weather band mode is selected, press the tun-

ing button (8) marked “ ” to change the WB channel

up and press the tuning button marked “ ” to

change the WB channel down. Each time the button is

pressed, the WB channel changes to the next chan-

nel.

Seek tuning

If the tuning button (8) is pressed for longer than half

of a second, the radio will begin to automatically

search for receivable frequencies and will stop at the

first one found. This function may not be available,

however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situ-

ation, perform manual tuning to select the desired sta-

tion.

Automatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (1) to change the radio to the

SCAN mode. In this mode, the radio scans through the

radio band until a station is found. The radio will stop

at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-

quency, after which scanning will continue until the en-

tire band has been scanned from the low end to the

high end.

Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN

mode and to stop on any displayed frequency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tun-

ing, stations are scanned in the direction of low fre-

quencies to high frequencies only.

FM1 FM2 AM

5-21

Audio

– CONTINUED –

Automatic tuning may not function properly if the sta-

tion reception is weakened by distance from the sta-

tion or proximity to tall buildings and hills.

Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button (7) allows you

to select that station in a single operation. Up to six

AM, FM1, FM2 and WB stations each may be preset.

How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM/AM” selection button to select AM,

FM1 or FM2 reception.

Press the “WB” button (3) to select the weather band.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (1) or tune the radio man-

ually until the desired station frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (7) for at least 1.5

seconds to store the frequency. The frequency of the

station will flash once on the display at this time. If the

button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the pre-

ceding selection will remain in memory.

NOTE

If the connection between the radio and battery

is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte-

nance or radio removal, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is nec-

essary to reset the preset buttons.

If a mobile telephone is placed near the radio, it

may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives

calls. This noise does not indicate a radio fault.

5-22

Audio

Built-in CD changer operation

(10)(9) (11) (12) (14)(13) (15) (16)

(17)(18)

US5021CB

(9) Eject button

(10) SCAN button

(11) CD (CD player selection) button

(12) Disc slot

(13) DISC indicator

(14) Repeat button

(15) Random button

(16) LOAD button

(17) Disc select buttons

(18) Track selection buttons

5-23

Audio

– CONTINUED –

Make sure to always insert a disc with the label

side up. If a disc is inserted with the label side

down, it might be ejected or the player might shut

off.

Single CDs (i.e., 8-cm/3-inch CDs) are not sup-

ported, and if inserted, they will be immediately

ejected.

If a disc is inserted during a radio broadcast, the

disc will interrupt the broadcast.

How to insert a CD(s)

Inserting a CD

1. Press “LOAD” button (16). If the magazine in the

player has an idle position where you can insert a disc,

the “DISC” indicator (13) associated with the idle posi-

tion will blink.

If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle po-

sition in the magazine.

2. As soon as the “DISC” indicator (13) begins to

blink, the “LOAD” will appear on display for a period of

15 seconds. Insert a disc during the period. The disc

will be then automatically drawn in, and the player will

begin to play back the first number of the disc.

To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1

and 2. The magazine will be loaded with discs in the

ascending order of position number.

If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you

have pressed the “LOAD” button, the player will begin

to play back the first number of the last disc you have

inserted.

The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is al-

ready inserted in the corresponding position of the

magazine.

While the player is in the loading mode, if you press

the “FM/AM” selection button (2), the player will enter

the standby mode. Press the “CD” button (11) to start

playback.

Inserting a disc in a desired position

1. Press the “LOAD” button (16). If the magazine in

the player has an idle position where you can insert a

disc, the “DISC” indicator (13) associated with the idle

position will blink.

The positions in the magazine the indicator of which

steadily lights up are already loaded with discs.

2. Press the “DISC SELECT” button (17) at the posi-

tion where you want to insert a disc. The associated

“DISC” indicator will blink, and the “LOAD” will be dis-

played.

3. If you insert a disc during the 15-second period

while the “LOAD” is on display, the disc will be auto-

matically drawn in, and the player will start playback of

the disc, beginning with the first number.

5-24

Audio

To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1

and 2.

While the player is in the loading mode, if you press

the “FM/AM” selection button (2), the player will enter

standby mode. Press the “CD” button (11) to start

playback.

Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading

mode)

1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” (16) button for

more than 1.5 seconds, the player will produce beep

sound and will enter the full disc loading mode.

2. A “DISC” indicator (13) will blink, and the “ALL

LOAD” will be on display for a period of 15 seconds. If

a disc is successfully loaded during this period, the

“DISC” indicator will stop blinking and will steadily

light.

3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next

“DISC” indicator will blink. Then repeat Step 2.

4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating

Steps 2 and 3, the player will start playback of the

discs, beginning with the one inserted first.

If you fail to insert any disc during each 15-second in-

terval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and

the player will start playback of the disc inserted first.

How to play back a CD or make a pause

When there is no CD inserted:

Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a CD(s)”.

When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of

the CD, beginning with the first number.

When there are CDs loaded:

Press a desired one of the “DISC SELECT” buttons

(17) the “DISC” indicator (13) of which steadily lights

up. The player will then start playback of the selected

CD, beginning with the first number.

To select a song from its beginning

Forward direction

Briefly press the “ ” button (18) to skip to the begin-

ning of the next track. Each time the button is pressed,

the indicated track number will increase.

Backward direction

Briefly press the “ ” button (18) to skip to the begin-

ning of the current track. Each time the button is

pressed, the indicated truck number will decrease.

Fast forwarding and fast reverse

Fast forwarding

Press the “ ” button (18) continuously for more than

5-25

Audio

– CONTINUED –

0.5 second to fast forward the disc.

Release the button to stop fast forwarding.

Fast reverse

Press the “ ” button (18) continuously for more than

0.5 second to fast reverse the disc.

Release the button to stop fast reverse.

Repeat playback

Press the “RPT” button (14) while a song is playing to

play the song repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will

come on and the song will be played continuously. To

cancel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then

the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback

mode is restored.

Random playback

Press the “RDM” button (15) while a disc is being

played back to play all songs on the disc in a random

order. The “RDM” indicator will come on and all songs

on the disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel the random mode, press the button again.

Then the “RDM” indicator goes out, and normal play-

back mode is restored.

Scan

When the “SCAN” button (10) is pressed while the disc

is being played back, you can hear the first 10 seconds

of each track to seach for the desired program. To

continue listening to the program, press the “SCAN”

button again. After all tracks on the disc have been

scanned, normal playback mode is restored.

How to unload CDs from the player

Ejecting a CD from the player

Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only

one disc.

1. Press the “DISC SELECT” button (17) of the disc

whose “DISC” indicator (13) is ON.

2. Press the “EJECT” button (9). Then the “DISC” in-

dicator associated with the disc you have selected will

blink, and the disc will be ejected.

To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1

and 2.

If you press the “EJECT” button after turning OFF the

ignition switch, only one disc will be ejected.

Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejec-

tion mode)

1. If you continue to press the “EJECT” button (9), the

player will produce beep sound and will enter the all

disc ejection mode.

2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other

discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If

you do not remove the ejected disc within 15 seconds,

5-26

Audio

the all disc ejection mode will be canceled.

NOTE

Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out,

because vibration might make it fall out.

Do not attempt to insert two or more discs into

the slot at a time. Doing so can cause mechan-

ical damage to the CD changer.

5-27

Audio

– CONTINUED –

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)

Loading and unloading compact discs

(5) (1) (2)

(4) (3)

HG5022BB

(1) Disc slot

(2) Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6)

(3) Disc select buttons (disc No.1 to

(4) Eject button

(5) Disc slot indicator

5-28

Audio

Do not attempt to insert two or more discs

into the slot at a time. Doing so can cause me-

chanical damage to the CD changer.

Use only music CDs identified by

a mark.

Do not use CDs listed below which could

cause damage to the CD player.

3-inch (8 cm) compact disc.

Any disc with a peel-off or seal on it.

Any disc with scratches and/or dust.

Bent disc.

Cleaning disc.

CD accessory. (E.g., 3-inch (8 cm) disc

adapter)

Do not insert or remove any disc when the

automatic transmission selector lever is in the

park position; the selector lever in that position

can interfere with disc insertion or removal,

causing scratches on the disc surface (for AT

vehicles).

To insert a disc

1. Press one of the “Disc select” buttons (3) (num-

bered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light (2)

is “OFF”.

The Disc indicator lights are located directly above the

corresponding “Disc select” buttons.

2. The indicator will begin blinking. The blinking will

last for 15 seconds.

During this period, insert a desired disc, and the disc

will begin to play. (If any disc is not inserted during this

period, the “Disc slot” (1) door will close. Repeat step

1.)

Be sure to hold a disc with the label side (the side

where titles are printed) up.

3. To insert another disc, repeat step 1 and 2 choos-

ing a different disc select button.

To insert six discs at a time

1. Press and hold the “Disc select” button number 1

until all disc indicators begin blinking (about 1.5 sec-

onds).

2. The indicators will blink for 15 seconds. During this

period, insert desired six discs.

3. When all discs are loaded, the first disc will begin to

play. (If no disc is inserted within this 15 seconds, the

entire disc load sequence will be canceled.)

To remove a disc

1. Press the desired one of the “Disc select” buttons

(3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator

light is on.

5-29

Audio

– CONTINUED –

2. Press the “Eject button” (4). The selected disc will

be ejected and the indicator light will begin blinking.

3. To remove another disc, repeat step 1 and 2

choosing a different “Disc select” button.

(To remove discs when the ignition switch is in the

“Lock” position, press the “Eject” button, and the first

disc will be ejected. Press the “Eject” button again,

and the next disc will be ejected and so on. At this

time, the “Disc select” buttons are disabled.)

To remove all discs at one time

1. Press and hold the “Eject” button (4) until all “Disc”

indicators begin blinking (about 1.5 seconds), and the

first disc will be ejected.

2. When the disc is removed, the next one will be

ejected, and so on.

To replace a playing disc with another

Simply press the desired one of “Disc select” buttons

(3) (numbered from 1 to 6) or press the “DISC select”

button on the radio unit to select the desired disc, and

the disc will begin to play.

Disc indicators

Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is occupied

by a disc.

Blinking: Disc player is either in loading, eject or

changing mode.

OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK” position.

Open/Closed disc slot indicator

When the disc slot is open, the disc indicators on both

sides of the slot illuminate.

Function control

Refer to CD changer control operating instructions de-

scribed in the “Type A audio set (if equipped)” section.

5-30

Audio

Precautions to observe when han-

dling a compact disc (CD)

Use only compact discs (CDs) that have the mark

shown above. CD-RWs cannot be used. Also, some

CD-Rs cannot be played.

In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can form inside

the CD player, preventing normal operation. If this

happens, eject the CD and wait for the player to dry

out.

Skipping may occur when the CD player is subject-

ed to severe vibration (for example, when the vehicle

is driven on a rough surface).

To remove a disc from the case, press the center of

the case and hold both edges of the disc. If the disc

surface is touched directly, contamination could cause

poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface.

Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are de-

posits, wipe the disc surface from the center outward

with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,

thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.

Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or

cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-stan-

dard shape (for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions

or problems might result.

A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in

places exposed to direct sunlight, near heaters or in

vehicles parked in the sun or hot days.

HS5017AA

5-31

Audio

– CONTINUED –

HS5018BA

6-1

Interior equipment

Interior lights ................................................ 6-2

Dome light ......................................................... 6-2

Cargo area light ................................................ 6-2

Map lights ...................................................... 6-3

Sun visors ..................................................... 6-3

Vanity mirror ...................................................... 6-4

Storage compartments ................................ 6-4

Glove box ........................................................... 6-5

Center console .................................................. 6-5

Overhead console ............................................. 6-6

Dashboard storage compartment ................... 6-6

Convenience net ............................................... 6-7

Coin tray ............................................................ 6-7

Cup holders .................................................. 6-8

Front passenger’s cup holder ......................... 6-8

Rear passenger’s cup holder ........................... 6-8

Accessory power outlets ............................. 6-9

Cigarette lighter socket ................................ 6-11

Use with a cigarette lighter .............................. 6-12

Using as an accessory power outlet ............... 6-13

Ashtray .......................................................... 6-14

Floor mat ....................................................... 6-15

Coat hook ...................................................... 6-16

Cargo area cover (if equipped) .................... 6-16

Using the cover ................................................. 6-16

To remove the cover ......................................... 6-17

To install the cover housing ............................ 6-17

Shopping bag hook ...................................... 6-18

Cargo tie-down hooks .................................. 6-18

Under-floor storage compartment ............... 6-19

6-2

Interior equipment

I nter ior e qu ipmen t

Interior lights

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light goes

out to avoid battery discharge.

Dome light

The dome light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.

DOOR (middle position): The dome light comes on

when any of the doors or the rear gate is opened. The

light remains on for several seconds and gradually

goes out after all doors and the rear gate are closed or

if the key is inserted in the ignition switch.

The light also can be turned on by use of the keyless

entry transmitter. See the “Remote keyless entry sys-

tem (if equipped)” in chapter 2 for detailed information.

OFF: The light stays off.

Cargo area light

The cargo area light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.

OFF: The light stays off.

DOOR: The light comes on only when the rear gate is

opened.

DOOR

OFF

HS6025BB

OFF

DOOR

HS6026BB

6-3

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

Map lights

To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off,

push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned

off to avoid battery discharge.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the

sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it

sideways.

HS6027BA HS6028BA

6-4

Interior equipment

Vanity mirror

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and

open the vanity mirror cover.

Storage compartments

Always keep the storage compartment

closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury

in the event of sudden stops or an accident.

Do not store spray cans, containers with

flammable or corrosive liquids or any other

dangerous items in the storage compartment.

HS6029BA

6-5

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it,

push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clock-

wise.

Center console

To open the lid, pull up the lock release.

If the console lid is fully opened when a large cup is put

in the rear passenger’s cup holder, the lid may hit the

cup and beverage may be spilled.

HS6030BB HS6031BA

6-6

Interior equipment

Overhead console

To open the console, push on the console lid lightly

and the lid will automatically open.

When your vehicle is in the sun or a warm day,

the inside of the overhead console heats up.

Avoid storing plastic or other heat-vulnerable

or flammable articles such as a lighter in the

overhead console.

Dashboard storage compartment

To open the dashboard compartment, push the button

on the lid and the lid will automatically open. Be sure

to close the compartment fully before driving.

HS6052BA HS6053BA

6-7

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

Convenience net

A net for storing small articles is provided at the front

passenger’s foot-well.

Coin tray

To open the coin tray, pull the upper edge of the lid.

HS6054AA HS6055BA

6-8

Interior equipment

Cup holders

Front passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is built in the center console, beside

the parking brake lever.

Rear passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is located at the back of the center

console. To use the cup holder, open the lid by pulling

its upper edge.

Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or

put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to an accident.

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot,

might burn you or your passengers. Spilled

beverages may also damage upholstery or car-

HS6032BA

HS6033BA

6-9

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

pets. Accessory power outlets

HS6056BA

6-10

Interior equipment

Accessory power outlets are provided in the center

console and in the cargo area.

Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is on tap at

the socket when the ignition switch is either in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by con-

necting it to the socket.

When both outlets are used at the same time, the total

power consumption of the electric appliances must be

120W or less.

Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the

accessory power outlet.

Do not place any foreign objects, especially

metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into

the accessory power outlet. That could cause a

short circuit. Always put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not in use.

Use only electrical appliances which are de-

signed for 12V DC and which consume less

than 120W. Overloading the accessory power

outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use dou-

ble adapters or more than one electrical appli-

ance.

If the plug on your electric appliance is either

too loose or too tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause

the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

Use of an electric appliance in the accessory

power outlet for a long period of time while the

engine is not running can cause battery dis-

charge.

Before driving your vehicle, make sure that

the plug and the cord on your electrical appli-

ance will not interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator and brake pedals.

If they do, do not use the electrical appliance

HS6034BA

6-11

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

while driving.

When the lid of the center console is closed, a gap

remains between the center console and the lid to

allow the power outlet in the center console to be

used. Pass the electrical appliance’s cord through

this gap.

Cigarette lighter socket

A cigarette lighter socket can be found behind the ash-

tray lid under the climate controls. Push gently on the

lid to open it. A cigarette lighter plug is an optional ac-

cessory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter socket may also be used as a

power source for an in-car use electrical appliance.

The electrical power socket located on the

lower part of the instrument panel is originally

designed to use a SUBARU genuine cigarette

HS6035BA

6-12

Interior equipment

lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette

lighter plugs in the socket. Doing so may cause

a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a

fire.

If the socket is ever used for a plug-in acces-

sory such as a mobile phone, that may damage

the portion of the socket’s internal mechanism

that causes a cigarette lighter plug to “pop out”

after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do

not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket

that has been used, even once, to power a plug-

in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to

stick and overheat, creating a potential fire haz-

ard.

Do not place any foreign objects, especially

metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into

the socket. That could cause a short circuit.

Use with a cigarette lighter

The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” and “ACC” positions.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait

a few moments. It will automatically spring up when

ready for use.

To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter

by the end with the heating element. Doing so

could result in injury and could also damage

the heating element.

HS6036BA

6-13

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it

will overheat.

Using as an accessory power outlet

Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is on tap at

the socket when the ignition switch is either in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

If you use the socket as an accessory power outlet,

take the following precautions.

When the socket is not in use, always put the cap on

the socket to prevent any foreign object from entering

it.

Use only in-car use electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC and which con-

sume less than 120W. Overloading the socket

can cause a short circuit. Do not use double

adapters or more than one electrical appliance.

If the plug on your electric appliance is either

too loose or too tight for the socket, this can re-

sult in a poor contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.

Use of an electric appliance in the socket for

a long period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

Before driving your vehicle, make sure that

the plug and the cord on your electrical appli-

ance will not interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator and brake pedals.

If they do, do not use the electrical appliance

while driving.

If the socket has been used for electrical appliances,

damage may have been done to the internal mecha-

nism that causes a cigarette lighter to “pop out” after

its element has been heated. For that reason, a ciga-

rette lighter, even if it is a genuine part, should not be

used in the socket. If you want to use the socket for a

cigarette lighter again, or to protect your purchaser be-

fore you sell your car, have your SUBARU dealer re-

place the socket with a new one.

6-14

Interior equipment

Ashtray

To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid below the

climate controls.

Fully close the lid after using it to help reduce residual

smoke.

To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold the right and

left sides of the ashtray and pull it out.

Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate

around the hinges of the ashtray’s inner lid. Clean

them off using a toothbrush or other narrow-end-

ed implement.

Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or

leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This

could cause a fire.

HS6037BA

US6060BA

6-15

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

Floor mat

A retaining pin is located on the driver’s side of the ve-

hicle next to the fuel filler door release.

The floor mat is secured using the built-in grommet, by

placing the grommet over the pin and pushing down-

ward.

Make sure the driver’s floor mat is placed back

in its proper location and correctly secured on

its retaining pin. If the floor mat slips forward

and interferes with the movement of the pedals

during driving, it could cause an accident.

HS6038BA

HS6039BA

6-16

Interior equipment

Coat hook

The coat hook is attached to the rear left passenger’s

hand grip.

Never hang anything on the coat hook that

might obstruct the driver’s view or that could

cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision.

And do not hang items on the coat hook that

weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.

Cargo area cover (if equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for covering the car-

go area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight.

This cover is detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of

the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as

shown. To rewind it, unhook it from the catches and it

will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the

cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it

UG6022BA

HS6042BA

6-17

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

is rewinding.

Do not place anything on the extended cover.

Putting excessive weight on the extended cov-

er can break it and an object on the cover could

tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or

collision. This could cause serious injury.

To remove the cover

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Take it off the retainer, lift it out.

3. Store the cover housing in the cargo area.

To install the cover housing

To install the cover, insert both ends of the cover hous-

ing into the retainers.

HS6043BA

6-18

Interior equipment

Shopping bag hook

A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the

cargo area.

To use the hook, pull the lower portion out.

Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook

that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or more.

Cargo tie-down hooks

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-down hooks

so that cargo can be secured with a cargo net or

ropes.

When using the hooks, raise them. When not in use,

lower the hooks.

The cargo tie-down hooks are designed only for

securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo

that exceeds the capacity of the hooks. The

maximum load capacity is 44 lbs (20 kg) per an

HS6046BA HS6047BA

6-19

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

hook. Under-floor storage compartment

There are four storage trays underneath the floor of

the cargo area. They can be used to store small items.

Always keep the lids closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden

stop or an accident.

Do not store spray cans, containers with

flammable or corrosive liquids or any other

dangerous items in the storage compartment.

HS6048BA

6-20

Interior equipment

Front, left and right side storage compartment

To open the lid, raise the cargo tie-down hooks and pull the tab up. The jack and jack handle are stored in the left

side storage compartment.

HS6049BA

6-21

Interior equipment

– CONTINUED –

Center storage compartment (Storage bucket)

To open the lid, pull the handle up.

To keep the lid open, hang the hook provided on the

backside of the lid on the rear edge of the roof.

The storage bucket is put on the spare wheel.

HS6050BA

HS6051BA

7-1

Starting and operating

Fuel ................................................................ 7-2

Fuel requirements ............................................. 7-2

Fuel filler lid and cap ........................................ 7-4

State emission testing (U.S. only) ............... 7-6

Preparing to drive ......................................... 7-8

Starting the engine ....................................... 7-9

Manual transmission vehicle ........................... 7-9

Automatic transmission vehicle ...................... 7-9

Starting the engine during cold weather

below –4°F (–20°C) ........................................ 7-10

Starting a flooded engine ................................. 7-10

Stopping the engine ..................................... 7-11

Manual transmission .................................... 7-11

Shifting speeds ................................................. 7-12

Driving tips ........................................................ 7-13

Automatic transmission ............................... 7-14

Selector lever for automatic transmission ..... 7-15

Shift lock release .............................................. 7-19

Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD)

(if equipped) .............................................. 7-20

Power steering .............................................. 7-21

Braking .......................................................... 7-21

Braking tips ....................................................... 7-21

Brake system ..................................................... 7-22

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........ 7-22

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .................... 7-23

ABS system self-check .................................... 7-23

ABS warning light ............................................. 7-24

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system (if equipped) ................................. 7-25

Steps to take if EBD system fails .................... 7-26

Parking your vehicle ..................................... 7-27

Parking brake .................................................... 7-27

Parking tips ....................................................... 7-28

Hill holder (for manual transmission — if

equipped) ................................................... 7-30

Cruise control (if equipped) ......................... 7-31

To set cruise control ........................................ 7-32

To temporarily cancel the cruise control ....... 7-32

To turn off the cruise control ........................... 7-33

To change the cruising speed ......................... 7-34

Self-leveling rear suspension (if equipped) 7-36

7-2

Starting and operating

Fuel

Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an

inappropriate fuel additive may cause engine

damage.

Fuel requirements

Non-Turbo models

The 2.5 Liter engine is designed to operate using un-

leaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or

higher.

Turbo models

The 2.5 Liter turbo engine is designed to operate using

premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

91 AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is not

available, regular unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used.

For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is

recommended that you use premium grade unleaded

gasoline.

Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the Research Oc-

tane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly re-

ferred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause

persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the

engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle some-

times knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when

you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service

technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane

rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept

only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no cir-

cumstances should leaded gasoline be used because

it will damage the emission control system and may

impair driveability and fuel economy.

Gasoline for California-certified LEV

Your vehicle was certified to California’s low emission

vehicle (LEV) standards as indicated on the under-

hood tune-up label. It is designed to optimize engine

and emission performance with gasoline that meets

the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline speci-

fications. If you live in any other state than California,

your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal

specifications. Gasoline sold outside California is per-

7-3

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

mitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect

the performance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter

and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell.

SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of

unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if

the problem is fuel related before returning your vehi-

cle to an authorized dealer for service.

Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help

prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel

system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your

emission control system working properly, and is a

way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continu-

ously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never need to add any

fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with materials called

oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the

air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain

alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should con-

tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the

proper operation of your SUBARU.

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now produc-

ing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to re-

duce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should

ask your service station operators if their gasolines

contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your

vehicle as explained below.

Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating

no lower than that specified in this manual.

Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes

mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used

in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the

fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient

quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion in-

hibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system.

Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under

these conditions.

If undesirable driveability problems are experienced

and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a differ-

ent brand of gasoline before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

Fuel system damage or driveability problems which

result from the use of improper fuel are not covered

under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

7-4

Starting and operating

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of

the vehicle. Fuels containing alcohol may

cause paint damage, which is not covered un-

der the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Fuel filler lid and cap

Refueling

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid release lever

up.

HS7005BA

HS7006BA

7-5

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

1) Open

2) Close

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly coun-

terclockwise.

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before

refueling, always first stop the engine and make

sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open

flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.

When opening the cap, do not remove the

cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and

spray out of the fuel filler neck especially in hot

weather, which may cause injury.

3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump auto-

matically stops. Do not add any more fuel.

4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear

a clicking noise. Be certain not to catch the tether un-

der the cap while tightening.

5. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off

immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be

damaged.

NOTE

If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or

if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK

ENGINE warning light may come on. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section located in

chapter 3.

Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel

tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may

cause damage to the fuel system.

Make sure that the cap is tightened until it

clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an

accident.

HS7007BB

7-6

Starting and operating

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of

the vehicle. Fuels may cause paint damage,

which is not covered under the SUBARU Limit-

ed Warranty.

Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap.

If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have

proper venting, and your fuel tank and emis-

sion control system might be damaged.

State emission testing (U.S. only)

At state inspection time, remember to tell your in-

spection or service station in advance not to place

your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna-

mometer. Otherwise, serious transmission dam-

age will result.

Some states have started using dynamometers in

their state inspection programs in order to meet their

obligation under federal law to implement stricter vehi-

cle emission standards to reduce air pollution from

cars. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing

device that allows your car’s wheels to turn while the

car remains in one place. Depending on the severity of

a state’s air pollution problems, the states must adopt

either a “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission in-

spection test. Normally, a portion of the basic emission

test consists of an emission inspector inserting an an-

alyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle

for a short period of time. States with more severe air

pollution problems are required to adopt an enhanced

vehicle emission test. This test simulates actual driv-

ing conditions on a dynamometer and permits more

accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution

than the basic emission test.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and

7-7

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emis-

sion testing programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program

that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.

There are some states that use four-wheel dynamom-

eters in their testing programs. When properly used,

that equipment will not damage an AWD SUBARU ve-

hicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be

jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be dis-

connected for state emission testing.

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must

NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy-

namometer. Attempting to do so will result in

uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause

an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

Resultant vehicle damage due to improper test-

ing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited

Warranty and is the responsibility of the state

inspection program or its contractors or licens-

ees.

The EPA has issued regulations for inspecting the On-

Board Diagnostic (OBD) system as part of the state

emissions inspection. The OBD system is designed to

detect engine and transmission problems that might

cause vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits.

These inspections apply to all 1996 model year and

newer passenger cars and light trucks. Several states

plus the District of Columbia have opted to start the

OBD system inspection prior to the required EPA reg-

ulation effective date of January 1, 2002. Other states

will add OBD system inspection in 2002.

The inspection of the OBD system consists of a vi-

sual operational check of the “CHECK ENGINE”

warning light/malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and an

examination of the OBD system with an electronic

scan tool while the engine is running

A vehicle passes the OBD system inspection if

proper the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL illu-

mination is observed, there is no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBD system readiness moni-

tors are complete.

A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the “CHECK

ENGINE” warning light/MIL is not properly operating

7-8

Starting and operating

or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored

in vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK ENGINE”

warning light/MIL illuminated.

A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or

fail) a vehicle if the number of OBD system readiness

monitors “Not Ready” is greater than three. Under

this condition, the vehicle operator should be instruct-

ed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to set the

monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.

Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact

their SUBARU Dealer for service.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks and adjust-

ments every day before you start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are

clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires.

Also check tires for proper inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.

4. Check that the hood and rear gate are fully closed.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat.

6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mir-

rors.

7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers

have fastened their seatbelts.

8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator

lights when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-

sition.

9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights af-

ter starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer flu-

id and other fluid levels should be checked daily,

weekly or at fuel stops.

7-9

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

Starting the engine

Do not operate the starter motor continuously

for more than ten seconds. If the engine fails to

start after operating the starter for five to ten

seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before

trying again.

Manual transmission vehicle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.

3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift

lever into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor

while starting the engine.

The starter motor will only operate when the clutch

pedal is pressed fully to the floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and

check the operation of the warning and indicator lights.

Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position

without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release

the key immediately after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a

while and then turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position again while depressing the accelerator pedal

half way down.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have

gone off after the engine has started. The fuel injection

system automatically lowers the idle speed as the en-

gine warms up.

Automatic transmission vehicle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.

3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” position

(preferably “P” position).

The starter motor will only operate when the select le-

ver is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and

check the operation of the warning and indicator lights.

Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position

without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release

the key immediately after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a

while and then turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position again while depressing the accelerator pedal

7-10

Starting and operating

half way down.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have

gone out after the engine has started. The fuel injec-

tion system automatically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure that the

selector lever is at the “P” or “N” position and that the

parking brake is applied.

If you restart the engine while the vehicle is

moving, shift the selector lever into the “N” po-

sition. Do not attempt to place the selector lever

of a moving vehicle into the “P” position.

Starting the engine during cold weath-

er below –4°F (–20°C)

If the engine is difficult to start using the normal meth-

od (without depressing the accelerator pedal), turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position while slightly

depressing the accelerator pedal.

Starting a flooded engine

If the engine does not start, it may be flooded (exces-

sive fuel in the engine).

In case of a flooded engine, turn the starter motor for

five seconds with the accelerator pedal fully de-

pressed. Repeat this two or three times until the en-

gine starts. Release the ignition switch and accelera-

tor pedal as soon as the engine starts.

7-11

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned off only when the

engine is idling.

Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is mov-

ing. This will cause loss of power to the power

steering and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It could also re-

sult in accidental activation of the “LOCK” po-

sition on the ignition switch, causing the steer-

ing wheel to lock.

Manual transmission

The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed 5-

forward and 1-reverse speed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob.

When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first re-

turn the shift lever to the neutral position then shift into

reverse gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move

the shift lever, and gradually let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in

neutral, release the clutch pedal momentarily, and

then try again.

135

24R

HS7008BA

7-12

Starting and operating

Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disen-

gaged (i.e., when the clutch pedal is depressed)

or with the shift lever in the neutral position.

Engine braking has no effect in either of these

conditions and the risk of an accident is conse-

quently increased.

Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has

completely stopped. It may cause damage to

the transmission to try shifting into reverse

when the vehicle is moving.

Shifting speeds

Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel economy and ve-

hicle performance during normal driving is ensured by

shifting up at the speeds listed in the following table.

Maximum allowable speeds

The following table shows the maximum speeds that

are possible with each different gear.

Never exceed the speed limit below for each gear po-

sition except for brief acceleration in an emergency.

The tachometer’s needle will enter the red area if

these speeds are exceeded. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and

poor fuel economy.

mph (km/h)

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (65)

4th to 5th 45 (73)

X and XS XT

1st 30 (49) 28 (46)

2nd 51 (82) 52 (83)

3rd 73 (117) 73 (118)

7-13

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve-

hicle is not traveling at a speed exceeding the

Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which

is about to be selected. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to engine over-revving and

this in turn can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of engine

brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip-

pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a

consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost

and the risk of an accident increased.

Driving tips

Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal

and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a

standstill on an upgrade. Either of those actions may

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever.

This may cause wear on the transmission compo-

nents.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to

slow traffic, turning corners, or driving up steep hills,

downshift to a lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to

4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as necessary; this helps to main-

tain a safe speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Re-

member, if you “ride” (over use) the brakes while de-

scending a hill, they may overheat and not work prop-

erly.

7-14

Starting and operating

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission is electronically controlled

with 4-forward speeds and 1-reverse speed.

NOTE

Immediately after a disconnected battery is recon-

nected or ATF (automatic transmission fluid) is re-

placed, you may feel that the automatic transmis-

sion operation is somewhat unusual.

This results from erasure or invalidation of data

the on-board computer has collected and stored in

memory to allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current condition

of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored

as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.

Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into

the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position while de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause

the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after

the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting

while the vehicle is moving may cause damage

to the transmission.

Do not race the engine for more than five sec-

onds in any position except the “N” or “P” po-

sition when the brake is set or the tires are on

blocks. This may cause the automatic transmis-

sion fluid to overheat.

Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving

positions into the “R” position or vice versa un-

til the vehicle has completely stopped. Such

shifting may cause damage to the transmis-

sion.

7-15

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

Selector lever for automatic transmis-

sion

: With the brake pedal depressed, move the lever

along the gate.

: Move the lever along the gate.

The selector lever has seven positions.

P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the

engine.

In this position, the transmission is mechanically

locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake

fully, then shift into the “P” position. Do not hold the ve-

hicle with only the transmission.

HS7009AA

HS7010BA

7-16

Starting and operating

A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic

transmission system to ensure safe starting of the ve-

hicle.

To shift the selector lever from the “P” to the any other

position, you have to depress the brake pedal fully

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This

prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.

If the shift lever does not move from the “P” position

with the brake pedal depressed, refer to the “Shift lock

release” section in this chapter.

R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first stop the vehi-

cle completely then move the lever to the “R” position.

N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled engine.

In this position the wheels and transmission are not

locked. In this position, the transmission is neutral; the

vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline un-

less the parking brake or foot brake is on.

NOTE (Turbo model)

If the selector lever is in the “N” position when you

stop the engine for parking, you may not subse-

quently be able to move it to the “R” and “P” posi-

tions. If this happens, turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position. You will then be able to move

the selector lever to the “P” position.

Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever

in the “N” (neutral) position. Engine braking

has no effect in this condition and the risk of an

accident is consequently increased.

D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving.

The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable

gear from 1st to 4th according to the vehicle speed

and the acceleration you require.

When more acceleration is required in this position,

press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold

that position. The transmission will automatically

downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release

the pedal, the transmission will return to the original

gear position.

While climbing a grade

When driving up hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is

prevented from taking place when the accelerator

7-17

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

pedal is released. This minimizes the chances of sub-

sequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerat-

ing again. This prevents repeated upshifting and

downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the

vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st

gear, depending on the way the accelerator pedal

is pressed to accelerate the vehicle again.

While going down a hill

When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake

pedal will cause the transmission to downshift to 3rd

gear, thus applying engine braking. Reacceleration for

a short time will cause the transmission to upshift nor-

mally.

In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a

downhill grade does not result in an automatic

downshift to 3rd gear. This can happen when the

automatic transmission fluid temperature is very

low, for example, during driving shortly after the

vehicle has been parked for an extended period of

time. When the ATF temperature has risen to a cer-

tain level, automatic downshift normally takes

place. In the meantime, downshift manually for en-

gine braking as required.

Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not

occur at speeds above approximately 48 mph (78

km/h).

3 (Third)

This position is for using engine braking when going

down a hill or for climbing a grade.

The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable

gear from 1st to 3rd according to the vehicle speed

and the acceleration you require.

When more acceleration is required in this position,

press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold

that position. The transmission will automatically

downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the

pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear

position.

2 (Second)

This position is for using engine braking when going

down a hill or for climbing a steep grade.

In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.

Use this position when starting off from a standstill on

slippery road surfaces such as mud or snow. It will en-

sure greater traction.

7-18

Starting and operating

1 (First)

This position is for driving up or down very steep

grades, or driving through mud or sand, or on slippery

surfaces. In this position, the transmission holds in the

1st gear.

Maximum speeds

The following tables show the maximum speeds that

are possible with each different gear. The tachome-

ter’s needle will enter the red area if these speeds are

exceeded.

When shifting down a gear, it is important to confirm

that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the

Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about

to be selected.

Exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speeds will result

in over-revving of the engine. In addition a powerful

engine brake will engage and control of the vehicle

may be lost.

mph (km/h)

In order to prevent over-revving during decelera-

tion of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in

the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in ex-

cess of the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear

to which the selector lever has been moved.

When shifting down a gear, ensure that the ve-

hicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the

Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which

is about to be selected. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to engine over-revving and

this in turn can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of engine

brakes when the vehicle is travelling on a slip-

pery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a

consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost

and the risk of an accident increased.

Driving tips

Always apply the foot or parking brake when the ve-

hicle is stopped in the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position.

Always set the parking brake when parking your ve-

hicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-

X and XS XT

1st 34 (54) 39 (63)

2nd 62 (100) 73 (117)

3rd 101 (162) 118 (189)

7-19

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

sion.

Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on

an uphill grade by using the “D”, “3”, “2”, or “1” position.

Use the brake instead.

Shift lock release

If the selector lever does not move from the “P” posi-

tion with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition

switch in the “ON” position, perform the following

steps:

To override the shift lock:

1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.

2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.

3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with the

regular screwdriver.

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

HS7009BA

HS7011BA

7-20

Starting and operating

5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selec-

tor lever from the “P” to the “N” position.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress

the brake pedal and start the engine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer im-

mediately to have the system repaired.

Rear viscous limited slip differential

(LSD) (if equipped)

The LSD provides optimum distribution of power ac-

cording to the difference in revolutions between the

right and left rear wheels that may be caused by cer-

tain driving conditions, thereby improving driving sta-

bility on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.

Never start the engine while a tire on one side

is jacked up, as the vehicle may move.

If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid con-

tinued spinning at high speed as this could ad-

versely affect the LSD.

If a different size rear tire is temporarily used

(as in an emergency), it will adversely affect the

LSD. Always replace it with a regular size tire as

soon as possible.

7-21

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

Power steering

The power steering system operates only when the

engine is running.

If you lose power steering assist because the engine

stops or the system fails to function, you can steer but

it will take much more effort.

NOTE

Right after the engine has been started and before

it has warmed up, you may hear a noise coming

from areas adjacent to the power steering pump

which is located at the right-front area of the en-

gine compartment. This noise is normal. It does

not indicate power steering system trouble.

Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully

locked position left or right for more than five

seconds. This may damage the power steering

pump.

Braking

Braking tips

Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This can cause dangerous overheating

of the brakes and needless wear on the brake

pads and linings.

When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping dis-

tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehi-

cle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes.

Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking in addition

to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the

foot brake is used, the brakes may start working im-

properly because of brake fluid overheating, caused

by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift

into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

7-22

Starting and operating

Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire

is punctured. This could cause a loss of control of the

vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

Brake system

Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems.

Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one

circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails, the brake

pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual

and you will need to press it down much harder. And a

much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehi-

cle.

Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to

assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while

driving because that will turn off the brake booster, re-

sulting in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even when the brake

booster completely stops functioning. If this happens,

however, you will have to push the pedal much harder

than normal and the braking distance will increase.

Disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors

The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the

disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads

are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc

brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle

checked by your SUBARU dealer.

HS7012BA

7-23

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which

may occur during sudden braking or braking on slip-

pery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of

steering control and directional stability caused by

wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a

chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake

pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

Always use the utmost care in driving – over-

confidence because you are driving with an

ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a se-

rious accident.

The ABS system does not always decrease

stopping distance. You should always main-

tain a safe following distance from other vehi-

cles.

When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel

roads, icy roads, or over deep newly fallen

snow, stopping distances may be longer for a

vehicle with the ABS system than one without.

When driving under these conditions, there-

fore, reduce your speed and leave ample dis-

tance from other vehicles.

When you feel the ABS system operating,

you should maintain constant brake pedal pres-

sure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing

so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.

ABS system self-check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and

hear the operating sound of ABS from the engine com-

partment just after the vehicle is started. This is

caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS sys-

tem being carried out and does not indicate any abnor-

mal condition.

7-24

Starting and operating

ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position and goes out after

about two seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system is working

properly.

When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such

as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning

light may come on. This is due to the low battery volt-

age and does not indicate a malfunction. When the

battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.

If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS

system may not be working properly.

When the warning light is on, the ABS function

shuts down; however, the conventional brake

system continues to operate normally.

The warning light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The warning light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, but it

does not go out even when the vehicle speed

exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

The warning light comes on during driving.

If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at

the first available opportunity by your SUBARU

dealer.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as described be-

low, the ABS system may be considered normal.

The warning light comes on right after the en-

gine is started but goes out immediately, remain-

ing off.

The warning light remains on after the engine

has been started, but it goes out when the vehicle

HS1103CA

7-25

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).

The warning light comes on during driving, but

it goes out immediately and remains off.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system (if equipped)

The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the

brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater

proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjust-

ing the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels

in accordance with the vehicle’s loading condition and

speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS system

and uses some of the ABS system’s components to

perform its function of optimizing the distribution of

braking force. If any of the ABS components used by

the EBD function fails, the EBD system also stops

working.

When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a

chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

7-26

Starting and operating

Steps to take if EBD system fails

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system

stops working and the brake system warning light and

ABS warning light come on simultaneously.

The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system

warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simulta-

neously during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conventional braking

system will still function. However, the rear wheels will

be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied

harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may there-

fore become somewhat harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously, take the following

steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both warning lights go

out, the EBD system may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again and stay illu-

minated after the engine has been restarted, shut

down the engine again, apply the parking brake, and

check the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the “MIN” mark,

the EBD system may be faulty. Drive carefully to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspect-

ed.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN” mark, DO

NOT drive the vehicle. Instead, have the vehicle towed

to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

Driving with the brake system warning light

on is dangerous. This indicates your brake sys-

tem may not be working properly. If the light re-

mains on, have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are

HS1103DA

7-27

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

operating properly, do not drive the vehicle.

Have your vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

Parking your vehicle

Parking brake

To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly

and hold it down while fully pulling up the parking

brake lever.

To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly,

press the release button, then lower the lever while

keeping the button pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the engine is run-

ning, the parking brake warning light comes on. After

starting the vehicle, be sure that the warning light has

gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to the

HS7014BA

7-28

Starting and operating

“Warning and indicator lights” section (chapter 3).

Never drive while the parking brake is set be-

cause this will cause unnecessary wear on the

brake linings. Before starting to drive, always

make sure that the parking brake has been fully

released.

Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always set the parking

brake firmly and put the shift lever in the “1” (1st) for an

upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a downgrade for manual

transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) position for

automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the park-

ing brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never rely

on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel.

When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front

wheels should be turned away from the curb.

US7510AA

7-29

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be

turned into the curb.

Never leave unattended children or pets in

the vehicle. They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through inadvertent oper-

ation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

the temperature in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause severe

or possibly fatal injuries to people.

Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate-

rials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come near hot en-

gine or exhaust system parts.

Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in

the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the

passenger compartment, occupants in the ve-

hicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO)

contained in the exhaust gas.

US7511AA

7-30

Starting and operating

Hill holder (for manual transmission

— if equipped)

The Hill holder is a device to make starting on an uphill

grade easier.

On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal is de-

pressed while the brake pedal is also depressed, brak-

ing power is maintained temporarily by the Hill holder

when the brake pedal is released. The driver is there-

fore able to start the vehicle the same way as on a lev-

el grade, just using the clutch and accelerator pedal.

The Hill holder does not operate when the vehicle is

facing downhill. And the Hill holder may not operate on

slight grades.

When starting in reverse and using the Hill holder, a

braking effect may be felt even after the brake pedal

has been released. However, this braking effect

should disappear once the clutch pedal is released.

A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle begins to

move forward after being reversed.

If the braking power of the Hill holder is insufficient af-

ter the brake pedal is released, apply more braking

power by pressing the brake pedal again.

US7512BA

US7513BA

7-31

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

The Hill Holder is a device only for helping the

driver to START the vehicle on an uphill grade.

To prevent accidents when the vehicle is

parked on a slope, be sure to firmly set the

parking brake. When setting the parking brake,

make sure that the vehicle remains stationary

when the clutch pedal is released.

Cruise control (if equipped)

Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant ve-

hicle speed without holding your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is

25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch

is turned “OFF” when the cruise control is not in use to

avoid unintentionally setting the cruise control.

Do not use the cruise control under any of the

following conditions. This may cause loss of

vehicle control:

HS7017AA

7-32

Starting and operating

driving up or down a steep grade

driving on slippery or winding roads

driving in heavy traffic

To set cruise control

1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch. The indicator light

on the combination meter will come on.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle

reaches the desired speed.

3. Push the control lever downward in the “SET,

COAST” direction and release it. Then release the ac-

celerator pedal.

The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while

driving with the cruise control activated. Simply de-

press the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle

will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.

To temporarily cancel the cruise con-

trol

There are four ways to cancel the cruise control tem-

HS1103EA

HS7018CA

7-33

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

porarily:

Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction. (if

so equipped)

Depress the brake pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission ve-

hicles only).

Shift the selector lever into the “N” position (auto-

matic transmission vehicles only).

To resume the cruise control after it has been tempo-

rarily canceled and with vehicle speed of about 20

mph (32 km/h) or more, push the control lever upward

in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction to return to the

original cruising speed automatically.

To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

Push the main switch again.

Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” po-

sition (but only when the vehicle is completely

stopped).

HS7018DA

HS7018EA

7-34

Starting and operating

To change the cruising speed

To increase the speed (by control lever)

Push the control lever upward in the “ACCEL, RE-

SUME” direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Then, release the control lever.

The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized

and treated as the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual vehicle speed

and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the

set speed can be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each

time by pressing the control lever upward in the “AC-

CEL, RESUME” direction quickly within 0.5 second.

To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed.

2. Push the control lever downward in the “SET,

COAST” direction once. Now the desired speed is set

and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without

depressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE

If the difference between the actual vehicle speed

when the control lever is pushed downward and

the speed last time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8

km/h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph

(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the cruise control

HS7018EA HS7018CA

7-35

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

system unit regards this lever operation as that in-

tended to decrease the vehicle speed.

To decrease the speed (by control lever)

Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST”

direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the de-

sired speed. Then, release the control lever. The vehi-

cle speed at that moment will be memorized and treat-

ed as the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual vehicle speed

and the set speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the

set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

by pressing the control lever downward in the “SET,

COAST” direction quickly within 0.5 second.

To decrease the speed (by brake pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control

temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed,

press the control lever downward in the “SET,

COAST” direction once. Now the desired speed is set

and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without

depressing the accerelator pedal.

HS7018CA

7-36

Starting and operating

Self-leveling rear suspension (if

equipped)

The self-leveling suspension adjusts the vehicle body

position automatically to keep it level at all times irre-

spective of the number of occupants and the amount

of cargo.

The self-leveling system is incorporated in the rear

suspension shock absorber and operates only when

the vehicle is in motion.

Owing to the self-leveling suspension, the vehicle

body is adjusted to the proper position after several

drive trips, even if the rear of the vehicle is lowered by

loaded cargos or a coupled trailer.

If cargos are unloaded all at once, the vehicle height

may become higher than the normal level. This is be-

cause that the hydraulic pressure in the self-leveling

suspension was increased for leveling the body when

the cargos were loaded. In such a case, the vehicle

height will return to the original level after several driv-

ing trips.

NOTE

If the rear axle is loaded excessively, the vehicle

HS7019BA

HS7020BA

7-37

Starting and operating

– CONTINUED –

body may not be adjusted to the proper position.

8-1

Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) .............................. 8-2

Fuel economy hints ...................................... 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ... 8-3

Catalytic converter ....................................... 8-4

Periodic inspections .................................... 8-5

Driving in foreign countries ......................... 8-6

Driving tips for AWD vehicles ..................... 8-6

Off road driving ............................................ 8-8

Winter driving ............................................... 8-10

Operation during cold weather ........................ 8-10

Driving on snowy and icy roads ...................... 8-11

Corrosion protection ........................................ 8-12

Snow tires .......................................................... 8-13

Tire chains ......................................................... 8-13

Rocking the vehicle .......................................... 8-14

Loading your vehicle ................................... 8-14

Vehicle capacity weight .................................... 8-16

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........ 8-17

Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ............... 8-17

Trailer hitch (if equipped) ............................ 8-22

Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-23

When you do not tow a trailer .......................... 8-25

Trailer towing ................................................ 8-25

Warranties and maintenance ........................... 8-25

Maximum load limits ......................................... 8-26

Trailer hitches ................................................... 8-30

Connecting a trailer .......................................... 8-31

Trailer towing tips ............................................. 8-33

8-2

Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving – the

first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

The performance and long life of your vehicle are de-

pendent on how you handle and care for your vehicle

while it is new. Follow these instructions during the

first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):

Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine

speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.

Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle

speed for a long time, either fast or slow.

Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, ex-

cept in an emergency.

Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to

an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when

brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new

ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.

Select the proper gear position for the speed and

road conditions.

Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always

accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed.

Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.

Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the

engine.

Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

Keep the engine properly tuned.

Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown

on the tire placard, which is located under the door

latch on the driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

Use the air conditioner only when necessary.

Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.

Avoid carrying unnecessary cargo.

8-3

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monox-

ide)

Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine ex-

haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a color-

less and odorless gas which is dangerous, or

even lethal, if inhaled.

Always properly maintain the engine exhaust

system to prevent engine exhaust gas from en-

tering the vehicle.

Never run the engine in a closed space, such

as a garage, except for the brief time needed to

drive the vehicle in or out of it.

Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a

lengthy time while the engine is running. If that

is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to

force fresh air into the vehicle.

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to

ensure that the ventilation system always

works properly.

If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon as possible. If

you must drive under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

Keep the rear gate closed while driving to

prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction of the met-

als used in the manufacture of the exhaust sys-

tem, you may hear a crackling sound coming from

the exhaust system for a short time after the en-

gine has been shut off. This sound is normal.

8-4

Driving tips

Catalytic converter

Turbo model

Non-turbo model

The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust sys-

tem. It serves as catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx

in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of

leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter.

Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the ve-

hicle.

Avoid racing the engine.

Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is

moving.

Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine

US8511BA

HS8002BA

8-5

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete

combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired

by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treat-

ment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the

exhaust system.

Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the

vehicle anywhere near flammable materials

(e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the

catalytic converter operates at very high tem-

peratures.

Keep everyone and flammable materials

away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is

running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times,

always have the recommended maintenance services

listed in the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified

time or mileage intervals.

8-6

Driving tips

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in another country:

Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to

the “Fuel requirements” section in chapter 7.)

Comply with all regulations and requirements of

each country.

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

All wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four

wheels. AWD vehicles provide better traction when

driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting

power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU

AWD can also provide added traction during acceler-

ation and added engine braking force during deceler-

ation.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle

differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle

and it contains some features unique to AWD. For

HS8003BA

8-7

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the

AWD system, you should keep the following tips in

mind:

An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper

roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two

wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in han-

dling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sud-

den braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or

turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and

maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.

When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the

same size, construction, brand, and load range as the

original tires listed on the tire placard. Using other siz-

es or construction may result in severe mechanical

damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may af-

fect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer

calibration, and clearance between the body and tires.

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle

control.

Always check the cold tire pressure before starting

to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided

on the tire placard, which is located under the door

latch on the driver’s side.

Tire chains should always be placed on the front

wheels only.

There are some precautions that you must observe

when towing your vehicle. For detail information, see

the “Towing” section in chapter 9.

Always maintain a safe driving speed accord-

ing to the road and weather conditions in order

to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn,

during sudden braking or under other similar

conditions.

Always use the utmost care in driving – over-

confidence because you are driving an all

wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri-

ous accident.

8-8

Driving tips

Off road driving

Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clear-

ance, your SUBARU can be driven on ordinary roads

or off-road. But please keep in mind that an AWD

SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither a conven-

tional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you

do take your SUBARU off-road, certain common

sense precautions such as the following should be

taken:

Make certain that you and all of your passengers

are wearing seat belts.

Carry some emergency equipment, such as a tow-

ing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit

and portable phone or citizens band radio.

Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by

driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain.

Slow down and employ extra caution at all times.

When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of

marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive ei-

ther straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle

can much more easily tip over sideways than it can

end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes

that are too steep.

Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher

speeds.

Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering

wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure

your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and

thumbs on the outside of the rim.

If driving through water, such as when crossing

shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and

the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure

that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and com-

pletely through the stream. The water should be shal-

low enough that it does not reach the vehicle’s under-

carriage. Water entering the engine air intake or the

exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts

may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall.

Never attempt to drive through rushing water; regard-

less of its depth, it can wash away the ground from un-

der your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and

even vehicle rollover.

Always check your brakes for effectiveness immedi-

ately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by

driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Re-

peat that process several times to dry out the brake

discs and brake pads.

Do not drive or park over or near flammable materi-

als such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may

burn easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after the engine stops. This

8-9

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

could create a fire hazard.

After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand,

rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper,

rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under-

body. If the vehicle is used with these materials

trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical

breakdown or fire could occur.

Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make

certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks.

During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could

be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do

not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the

vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to

tip over.

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or

mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move

the selector lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best pos-

sible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can

obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the

transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those

specified in this manual.

Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driv-

ing conditions such as rough roads or off roads will ne-

cessitate more frequent replacement of engine oil,

brake fluid and transmission oil than that specified in

the maintenance schedule described in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.

Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while

operating it off-road and not using common sense pre-

cautions such as those listed above is not eligible for

warranty coverage.

Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-road driving.

Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt

buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.

Always maintain a safe driving speed accord-

ing to the road and weather conditions in order

to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn,

during sudden braking or under other similar

conditions.

Always use the utmost care in driving – over-

confidence because you are driving an all

wheel drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri-

ous accident.

8-10

Driving tips

Winter driving

Operation during cold weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire

chains, a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a

small shovel, and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures re-

duce battery capacity. The battery must be in good

condition to provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for

cold weather. Heavy summer oil will cause harder

starting.

Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them

with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate

the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door

is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an anti-

freeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other

substitutes because they may damage the paint of the

vehicle.

Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice

from your shoes because that could make the pedals

slippery and dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driving, check

that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other

controls operate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under

the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During

severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe

to do so and check under the fenders periodically.

HS8004AA

8-11

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

Parking in cold weather

Do not use the parking brake when parking for long

periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that po-

sition. Instead, observe the following:

1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for manual trans-

mission vehicles, and in “P” for automatic transmission

vehicles.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle

from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows,

raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage

to them.

When the vehicle has been left parked after use on

roads heavily covered with snow, or has been left

parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the

brake system, which could cause poor braking action.

Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc

brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful

not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and

ABS harness.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under

your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust

pipe and from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine running.

Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel sys-

tem and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze ad-

ditive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold

weather.

Use only additives that are specifically designed for

this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its

effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extend-

ed period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capac-

ity.

Driving on snowy and icy roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden brak-

ing, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and

sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sud-

den braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake

effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a

8-12

Driving tips

lower gear when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can

cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of

vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehi-

cle’s braking performance on snowy and icy roads.

Refer to the “ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)” section in

chapter 7 for information on braking on slippery sur-

faces.

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads

such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause

loss of vehicle control.

Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper

blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear

window, use the defroster with the airflow control but-

ton/dial in the “ ” position and the temperature

control dial set for maximum warmth until the wiper

blades are completely thawed out. If your vehicle is

equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blades. To thaw out the rear wiper

blade, use the rear window defogger.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on

the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation,

use the defroster with the airflow control button/dial in

“ ” and the temperature control dial set for maxi-

mum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed

enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away us-

ing the windshield washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from

working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm,

pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you

stop the car at road side, use the hazard warning

flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades

(winter blades) during the seasons you could have

snow and sub-zero temperatures. Blades of this type

give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions.

Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehi-

cle.

Corrosion protection

Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section (chapter

10).

8-13

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

Snow tires

When replacing original tires with winter

(snow) tires, make sure you use only the same

size, construction and load range as the origi-

nal tires listed on the tire placard. Using other

sizes and construction may affect speedome-

ter/odometer calibration and clearance be-

tween the body and tires. It also may be danger-

ous and lead to loss of vehicle control.

You must install four winter tires that are of

the same size, construction, brand, and load

range. Mixing other sizes or constructions may

result in severe mechanical damage to the drive

train of your vehicle and may affect ride, han-

dling, braking and speedometer/odometer cali-

bration. It also may be dangerous and lead to

loss of vehicle control.

Do not use a combination of radial, belted

bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead to an acci-

dent.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” as orig-

inal equipment, which are designed to provide an ad-

equate measure of traction, handling and braking per-

formance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be

possible to enhance performance through use of tires

designed specifically for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires on your vehi-

cle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You

must install four winter tires that are of the same size,

construction, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this

may result in dangerous handling characteristics.

When you choose a tire, make sure that there is

enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.

Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of

the type of tires on your vehicle.

Tire chains

Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the

use of tire chains, in which case put the chains on the

front wheels only. Use only SAE class S type chains

that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to

damage the vehicle body or suspension.

When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below

19 mph (30 km/h).

Always use the utmost care when driving with tire

chains — overconfidence because you are driving

with tire chains could easily lead to a serious accident.

8-14

Driving tips

Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand,

or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and

move the selector lever back and forth between “D”

and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the

best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when

trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can

obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the

transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

Refer to the “Automatic transmission” section in chap-

ter 7 for information on holding the transmission in 2nd

position.

Loading your vehicle

Never allow passengers to ride on the folded

rear seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so

may result in serious injury.

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher

than the top of the seatback because it could

tumble forward and injure passengers in the

event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep lug-

gage or cargo low, as close to the floor as pos-

sible.

8-15

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

When you carry something inside the vehicle,

secure it whenever you can to prevent it from

being thrown around inside the vehicle during

sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.

Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These

loads raise the vehicle’s center of gravity and

make it more prone to tip over.

Secure lengthy items properly to prevent

them from shooting forward and causing seri-

ous injury during a sudden stop.

Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you

do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it

can change the way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the

life of your vehicle.

Do not place anything on the extended cargo

area cover. Such items could tumble forward in

the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This

could cause serious injury.

Do not carry spray cans, containers with flam-

mable or corrosive liquids or any other danger-

ous items inside the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded

cargo.

HS8005BA

8-16

Driving tips

Vehicle capacity weight The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by

weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum

load you can carry in your vehicle is shown as the Ve-

hicle Capacity Weight on the tire information label at-

tached to the driver’s side door jamb. It includes the to-

tal weight of driver and all passengers and their be-

longings, any optional equipment such as a trailer

hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue

load of a trailer.

The tire information label also shows recommended

tire inflation pressure under full loading and trailer tow-

ing conditions. Adjust tire inflation pressures accord-

ing to the loading conditions. For the tire inflation pres-

sures, refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in Chap-

ter 11.

HS8006BA

HS8024BA

8-17

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight

Rating)

The certification plate attached to the driver’s side

door jamb shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed

the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the

vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any op-

tional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore,

the GVW changes depending on the situation. The

GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-

hicle – including standard equipment, fluids, emergen-

cy tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle ca-

pacity weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and

rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage in-

side the vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than

the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW

may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution

of the luggage.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should con-

firm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the

GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi-

cle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range

than the originals because they may lower the GVWR

and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a high-

er load range than the originals do not increase the

GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped)

The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself.

Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar

kit to the roof rail and installing the appropriate carry-

ing attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

HS8007BA

8-18

Driving tips

When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof cross-

bar kit and a carrying attachment, never exceed the

maximum load limit explained below. You should also

be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the “Loading

your vehicle” section in this chapter for information on

loading cargo into or onto your vehicle. The maximum

load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach-

ment must not exceed 150 lb. (68 kg). Place the

heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and

evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all

cargo.

For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail

must be used together with a roof crossbar kit

and the appropriate carrying attachment. The

roof rail must never be used alone to carry car-

go. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a

dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo

could result.

When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure

that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying

attachment and cargo does not exceed the

maximum load limit. Overloading may cause

damage to the vehicle and create a safety haz-

ard.

Installing carrying attachments on the cross-

bars

When installing any carrying attachment such as a

bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket,

etc. on the crossbars, follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions and make sure that the attachment is se-

curely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments

designed specifically for the crossbars. A set of cross-

bars is designed to carry loads (cargo and attachment)

of not more than 150 lb. (68 kg). Before operating the

vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured

on the attachment.

Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is al-

tered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus

affecting the driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering

and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be in-

creased.

Removal and installation of the crossbars

The crossbars can be removed when you do not use

the roof to carry cargo.

8-19

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

To remove the crossbar

1) Crossbar end support

2) T-30 torx® head screw

1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx® head screw

from the top of each crossbar end support.

2. Move the end support and inner clamp to unhook

each side of the crossbar from the roof rail.

3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof rails.

NOTE

It may be necessary to move the Front crossbar

rearward, near the center of the roof rail for easier

removal. Use care not to cross-thread the screw in

the insert if it has been removed.

To install the crossbar

Front crossbar:

Front crossbar has 150 LBS. Load Label on right-hand

side.

HS8028BB

HS8025BA

8-20

Driving tips

1) Crossbar end support

2) T-30 torx® head screw

1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof rails, make

sure that the T-30 torx® head screw is fully loosened

from each end support.

2. Spread the inner clamp and the end support as far

apart as possible.

1) Load label

2) Direction arrow label

3. With the front direction arrow label on the top right

side of the crossbar pointing toward the front of the ve-

hicle, carefully place the crossbar across the top of the

vehicle so that the crossbar end supports rest on the

top of the roof rails approximately 6 inches (150 mm)

rearward in the front radius of the roof rail.

4. Move the end support and inner clamp to hook un-

der the end of the roof rail on both sides and loosely

assemble the T-30 torx® head screw with the tool pro-

vided into the threaded insert in the inner clamp on

each end of the crossbar.

HS8028BB

ONT

MAXIMUM LOAD 100 LBS. EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

6 in

(150 mm) HS8026BB

8-21

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

It may be necessary to start the inner clamp and

end support at the center of the roof rail for easier

installation, then move the crossbar forward. Use

care not to cross-thread the screw in the insert if it

has been removed.

5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on the roof

rails, and if available, use a T-30 torx® bit and torque

wrench and tighten the T-30 torx® head screws to 30

to 35 inch lbs. (3.4 to 4.0 N-m, 0.35 to 0.41 kg-m) of

torque (or tighten securely with the torx® wrench pro-

vided).

Rear crossbar:

1) T-30 torx® head screw

2) Front arrow label

Install the rear crossbar in the same manner as the

front crossbar.

NOTE

The rear crossbar should be positioned 6 inches

(150 mm) forward of the rear radius in the roof rail.

Do not carry cargo on the roof when the cross-

bars are removed. Luggage on the roof will be

ONT

6 in

(150 mm) HS8027BB

8-22

Driving tips

thrown forward or backward in sudden stops or

rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous

road hazard.

NOTE

Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure

the four T-30 crossbar clamp screws have been

checked, and retightened if necessary to 30 to 35

inch lbs. (3.4 to 4.0 N-m, 0.35 to 0.41 kg-m), as out-

lined in Step #5 above.

Trailer hitch (if equipped)

The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated

load.

When you tow a trailer, follow the instructions in the

next section “Trailer towing”.

Never exceed the maximum weight specified

for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident resulting in se-

rious personal injuries. Permissible trailer

weight changes depending on the situation. Re-

fer to the next section “Trailer towing” for pos-

sible recommendations and limitations.

Trailer brakes are required when the towing

load exceeds 1,000 lbs. (453 kg). Be sure your

trailer has safety chains and that each chain

will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight.

Towing trailers without safety chains could cre-

ate a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates

from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch

ball damage.

Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin

for positive locking placement before towing a

trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch re-

8-23

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

ceiver, the trailer could get loose and create a

traffic safety hazard.

Use only the ball mount supplied with this

hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying

hitch. Do not use with any type of weight dis-

tributing hitch.

Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver

tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver

tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the hitch receiv-

er tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin securely into the hitch pin.

4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does not come

off the hitch receiver.

HS8011BA

HS8012BA

8-24

Driving tips

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball

mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely

installed on the ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains

that will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. The

chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent

the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it

should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient

slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into ac-

count; however, be careful not to let them drag on the

ground.

Do not connect safety chains to part of the ve-

hicle other than the safety chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black four-pin

wire connector to the towing trailer’s wire harness

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness

by individually activating the brake, right turn signal,

left turn signal, stop, and parking lights on the trailer.

HS8013BB

HS8015BA

8-25

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before

launching or retrieving a watercraft.

When you do not tow a trailer

Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube

and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver

tube.

Place the dust cap over the fou-pin connector of the

hitch wire harness to protect against possible damage.

Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin con-

nector using terminal grease.

Trailer towing

Your car is designed and intended to be used primarily

as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts

additional loads on your car’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse ef-

fect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satis-

faction depend upon proper use of correct equipment

and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the ad-

vice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchas-

ing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment ap-

propriate for your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow

the instructions on correct installation and use provid-

ed by the trailer and other towing equipment manufac-

turers.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or ve-

hicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment,

or from any errors or omissions in the instructions ac-

companying such equipment or for your failure to fol-

low the proper instructions.

Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage

or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your

vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will

be required due to the additional load. (Refer to “Main-

8-26

Driving tips

tenance schedule under severe driving conditions” in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with

a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain

component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of

driving.

Maximum load limits

Never exceed the maximum load limits ex-

plained below. Exceeding the maximum load

limits could cause personal injury and/or vehi-

cle damage.

Adequate size trailer brakes are required

when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs

(453 kg) total weight.

Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total

weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make

sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle

and trailer are acceptable.

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo

load) must never exceed the maximum weight shown

below.

HS8016AA

8-27

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

*: Turbo model

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of

the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage,

trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the

GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine

the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting

your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Model Conditions Maximum

total trailer

weight

MT models When towing a trailer

without brakes.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

When towing a trailer with

brakes.

2,400 lbs

(1,087 kg)

AT models When towing a trailer

without brakes.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

When towing a trailer with

brakes.

2,000 lbs

(906 kg)

2,400 lbs

(1,087 kg)*

When towing a trailer on a

long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles

(8 km) with an outside

temperature of 104°F

(40°C) or above.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

US8508AA

8-28

Driving tips

Certification label

GVWR is shown on the certification plate located on

the driver’s side door jamb.

Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must nev-

er exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The

front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front

and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification

plate.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that

the total weight and weight distribution are within safe

driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

HS8007BA

US8030AA

8-29

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a

change in weight distribution while driving.

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 per-

cent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the

maximum value of 200 lbs (90 kg).

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom

scale as shown in the illustration above. When weigh-

ing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing cou-

pler at the height at which it would be during actual

towing, using a jack as shown.

HS8019AA

US8031BB

8-30

Driving tips

F: Front of vehicle

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution

of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with

more weight in the back than in the front; approximate-

ly 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front

and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distrib-

ute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and

right sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a

change in weight distribution while driving.

If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the

back of trailer’s axle than in the front, the load

is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to skid, espe-

cially during braking or when vehicle speed is

reduced during cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

Trailer hitches

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.

The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recom-

mended. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from

your SUBARU dealer.

If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure

the hitch is suited to your vehicle and trailer. Consult

with a professional hitch supplier to assist you in

choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure

to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s instructions for

installation and use.

Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper.

The bumper is not designed to handle that type of

load.

For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch

mounting bolts and nuts are tight.

60% 40% 50% 50%

HS8021BB

8-31

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

Never drill the frame or under-body of your ve-

hicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you

do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment through the

drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon mon-

oxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drill-

ing the frame or under-body of your vehicle

could cause deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled

hole.

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system,

brake system, or other systems when installing

a hitch or other trailer towing equipment.

Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can

cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bear-

ings, wheels or tires.

Connecting a trailer

Trailer brakes

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo

weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is re-

quired to be equipped with its own brake system. Elec-

tric brakes or surge brakes are recommended, and

must be installed properly. Check that your trailer’s

brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or

other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU’s brake

system is not designed to be tapped into the trailer’s

hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for more infor-

mation about the trailer’s brake system.

Adequate size trailer brakes are required

when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs

(453 kg) total weight.

Do not directly connect your trailer’s hydrau-

lic brake system to the hydraulic brake system

in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause

the vehicle’s brake performance to deteriorate

and could lead to an accident.

8-32

Driving tips

Trailer safety chains

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should

break or become disconnected, the trailer could get

loose and create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and

trailer with trailer safety chains. Pass the chains cross-

ing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the

trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer

tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow

sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations

into account; however, be careful not to let them drag

on the ground.

For more information about the safety chain connec-

tion, refer to the instructions for your hitch and trailer.

Always use safety chains between your vehicle

and the trailer. Towing a trailer without safety

chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling

damage or hitch ball damage.

Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the

standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of

view without significant blind spots. If significant blind

spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side mirrors,

use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/

province and/or other applicable regulations.

Trailer lights

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical

system requires modifications to the vehicle’s lighting

circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wir-

ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected

properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check

US8506BA

8-33

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

for proper operation of the turn signals, the brake

lights and parking lights each time you hitch up.

Direct splicing or other improper connection of

trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electri-

cal system and cause a malfunction of your ve-

hicle’s lighting system.

Tires

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly

inflated to the pressure specified on the tire placard lo-

cated on the driver’s side center pillar.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper infla-

tion pressure should be in accordance with the trailer

manufacturer’s specifications.

Trailer towing tips

Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing

a trailer in hilly country on hot days.

When towing a trailer, steering, stability,

stopping distance and braking performance

will be different from normal operation. For

safety’s sake, you should employ extra caution

when towing a trailer and you should never

speed. You should also keep the following tips

in mind:

Before starting out on a trip

Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mount-

ing are in good condition. If any problems are appar-

ent, do not tow the trailer.

Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trail-

er attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the

front and down at the rear, check the total trailer

weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then con-

firm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.

Check that the tire pressures are correct.

Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected

properly. Confirm that

– the trailer tongue is connected properly to the

hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is connected properly

and trailer’s brake lights illuminate when the vehi-

cle’s brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s

turn signal lights flash when the vehicle’s turn signal

lever is operated.

– the safety chains are connected properly.

8-34

Driving tips

– all cargo in the trailer is secured safety in position.

– the side mirrors provide a good rearward field of

view without a significant blind spot.

Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of

the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a

trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping

and backing up.

Driving with a trailer

You should allow for considerably more stopping

distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking

because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and

loss of control.

Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If

your vehicle has a manual transmission, always start

out in first gear and release the clutch at moderate en-

gine revolution.

Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane

changes.

Slow down before turning. Make a longer than nor-

mal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be

closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn.

In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.

Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of

your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds

can be due to weather conditions or the passing of

large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the

steering wheel and slow down immediately but gradu-

ally.

When passing other vehicles, considerable dis-

tance is required because of the added weight and

length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn

2) Right turn

Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes prac-

tice. When backing up with a trailer, never accelerate

or steer rapidly. When turning back, grip the bottom of

the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left

for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle

is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs

HS8023BB

8-35

Driving tips

– CONTINUED –

performed immediately by the nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

Driving on grades

Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift

into lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to

utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheat-

ing of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not make sudden

downshifts.

When driving uphill in hot weather, the air condition-

er may turn off automatically to protect the engine from

overheating.

When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to

the water temperature gauge pointer (for all vehicles)

and AT OIL TEMP warning light (for AT vehicles) since

the engine and transmission are relatively prone to

overheating under these conditions. If the water tem-

perature gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT

zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates,

immediately switch off the air conditioner and stop the

vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine

overheating” section in chapter 9, and “Warning and

indicator lights” section in chapter 3.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid

using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an

uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot

brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to over-

heat. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with an automat-

ic transmission, avoid driving with the gear selector le-

ver in “D” when towing a heavy trailer to prevent fluid

overheating. A lower gear should be used.

Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer

when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You

should not park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a

hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the

following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the

vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the

regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the park-

ing brake; slowly release the regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission)

or “P” (automatic transmission) and shut off the en-

gine.

9-1

In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency ............................................ 9-2

Flat tires ......................................................... 9-3

Changing a flat tire ........................................... 9-3

Jump starting ................................................ 9-9

How to jump start ............................................. 9-10

Engine overheating ....................................... 9-12

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment .................................................. 9-12

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment .................................................. 9-12

Towing ........................................................... 9-13

Towing and tie-down hooks ............................ 9-13

Using a flat-bed truck ....................................... 9-15

Towing with all wheels on the ground ............ 9-15

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be

unlocked ..................................................... 9-17

Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be

closed ......................................................... 9-18

Maintenance tools ......................................... 9-19

Jack and jack handle ........................................ 9-19

9-2

In case of emergency

In c ase of emerg ency

If you park your vehicle in case of an

emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or

night to warn other drivers when you have to park your

vehicle under emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off

the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be activated regard-

less of the ignition switch position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard

warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the

switch again.

When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn

signals do not work.

HS3019AA

9-3

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake sud-

denly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually re-

ducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

Changing a flat tire

Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a

loose road surface. The jack can come out of

the jacking point or sink into the ground and

this can result in a severe accident.

Use only the jack provided with your vehicle.

The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed

only for changing a tire. Never get under the ve-

hicle while supporting the vehicle with this

jack.

Always turn the engine off before raising the

flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never

swing or push the vehicle supported with the

jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point

due to a jolt and this can result in a severe acci-

dent.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible,

then stop the engine.

2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual

transmission vehicle in reverse or an automatic trans-

mission vehicle in the “P” (Park) position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have ev-

eryone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire di-

agonally opposite the flat tire.

HS9003BA

9-4

In case of emergency

1) Jack

2) Jack handle

3) Spare tire

5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel nut wrench.

The spare tire is stored under the floor of the cargo ar-

ea.

To remove the spare tire:

Open the lid and hang the hook provided on the under

side of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to keep the

lid open.

Remove the storage bucket. Turn the attaching bolt

counterclockwise, then take spare tire out.

1) Storage bucket

2) Attaching bolt

3) Spare tire

The jack is stored under the left side of the cargo floor.

2HS9005BB

HS9004BB

9-5

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

To take out the jack:

First raise the cargo tie-down hook on the rear-left side

of the cargo area and pull the tab to open the lid, turn

the jack screw counterclockwise to loosen it, then re-

move the jack.

To take out the jack handle:

Open the rear-left and center lids in the cargo area by

pulling their tabs.

HS9006BA HS9007BA

9-6

In case of emergency

6. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench

but do not remove the nuts.

7. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear

HS9008BA HS9009BA

HS9023BA

9-7

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

jack-up point closest to the flat tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engag-

es firmly into the jack-up point.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn

the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise

the vehicle higher than necessary.

9. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

10.Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting

HS9010BA

HS9011BA

HS9012AA

9-8

In case of emergency

surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth.

11.Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts.

Tighten them by hand.

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or

nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could

cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

12.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the

vehicle.

13.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tight-

ening order in the illustration.

The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to 72 ft-lb (80

to 100 N-m, 8 to 10 kg-m). This torque is equivalent to

applying about 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of

the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the

wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench

because you may exceed the specified torque. Have

the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automo-

tive service facility.

14.Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment.

Put the spacer and tighten the attaching bolt firmly.

Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their stor-

HS9008CB

HS9014BA

9-9

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

age locations.

Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the

passenger compartment after changing

wheels. In a sudden stop or collisions, loose

equipment could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper

place.

Jump starting

Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it

come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or

the vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the

exposed area with water immediately. Get med-

ical help if the fluid has entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme-

diately drink a large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical help.

Keep everyone including children away from

the battery.

The gas generated by a battery explodes if a

flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke

or light a match while jump starting.

Never attempt jump starting if the discharged

battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to

burst or explode.

Whenever working on or around a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protectors, and remove

metal objects such as rings, bands or other

metal jewelry.

Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on

them do not have loose or missing insulation.

9-10

In case of emergency

Do not jump start unless cables in suitable con-

dition are available.

A running engine can be dangerous. Keep

your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools

away from the cooling fan, belts and any other

moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches

and ties is advisable.

When your vehicle does not start due to a run down

(discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started

by connecting your battery to another battery (called

the booster battery) with jumper cables.

Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you

are unsure about the proper procedure for jump start-

ing, consult a competent mechanic.

How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the

negative terminal is grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let

the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence

illustrated.

9-11

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

1) Booster battery

2) Engine lifting bracket

HS9015BB

1)Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the dis-

charged battery.

2)Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+) ter-

minal of the booster battery.

3)Connect one end of the other

cable to the negative (–) terminal

of the booster battery.

4)Connect the other end of the ca-

ble to the engine lifting bracket.

Make sure that the cables are not

near any moving parts and that the

cable clamps are not in contact

with any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle

with the booster battery and run it at

moderate speed. Then start the en-

gine of the vehicle that has the dis-

charged battery.

6. When finished, carefully discon-

nect the cables in exactly the reverse

order.

9-12

In case of emergency

Engine overheating

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has fully

cooled down. When the engine is hot, the cool-

ant is under pressure. Removing the cap while

the engine is still hot could release a spray of

boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and

stop the vehicle in a safe place.

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment

Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the

vehicle until it cools down.

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compart-

ment.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not

turning, immediately turn the engine off and contact

your authorized dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped,

turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated

zone, turn the engine off.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the

coolant level in the reserve tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW” mark, add cool-

ant up to the “FULL” mark.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add cool-

ant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap

and fill the radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first

wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn

the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing

down until it stops. Release the pressure from the ra-

diator. After the pressure has been fully released, re-

move the cap by pressing down and turning it.

9-13

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU

dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the

following procedures for safety.

Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with

the front wheels raised off the ground while the

rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear

wheels raised off the ground while the front

wheels are on the ground. This will cause the

vehicle to spin away due to the operation or de-

terioration of the center differential.

Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in an emergen-

cy (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or

snow).

Front towing hook:

US9513BA

HS9017BA

9-14

In case of emergency

Rear towing hook:

To prevent deformation to the front bumper and

the towing hook, do not apply excessive lateral

load to the towing hooks.

Tie-down hooks:

1) Tie-down hooks

2) Towing and tie-down hooks

US9515BA

1US9516BB

9-15

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

Use only the specified towing hooks and tie-

down hooks. Never use suspension parts or

other body parts for towing or tie-down purpos-

es.

Never use the tie-down hook on the under-

side of the vehicle closest to the muffler for

towing purposes.

Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the

following procedures to ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position for au-

tomatic transmission vehicles or “1st” for manual

transmission vehicles.

2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with

safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally

tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

Towing with all wheels on the ground

1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels

and add oil to bring it to the upper level if necessary.

US9517AA

US9518AA

9-16

In case of emergency

2. Release the parking brake and put the transmis-

sion in neutral.

3. The ignition switch should be in the “ACC” position

while the vehicle is being towed.

4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent dam-

age to the vehicle.

Never turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position while the vehicle is being towed be-

cause the steering wheel and the direction of

the wheels will be locked.

Remember that the brake booster and power

steering do not function when the engine is not

running. Because the engine is turned off, it will

take greater effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

If transmission failure occurs, transport your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

Do not run the engine while being towed us-

ing this method. Transmission damage could

result if the vehicle is towed with the engine

running.

For vehicles with automatic transmission,

the traveling speed must be limited to less than

20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling distance to

less than 31 miles (50 km). For greater speeds

and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

9-17

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be

unlocked

In the event that you cannot unlock the rear gate by

operating the power door locking switches or the re-

mote keyless entry system, you can unlock it from in-

side the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the bottom-center of

the rear gate trim.

2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever behind the

rear gate trim panel.

3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the lever inside

the trim upward.

4. Open the rear gate from outside by raising the rear

gate handle.

HS9025BA

HS9026BA

9-18

In case of emergency

Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be

closed

If the moonroof cannot be closed with the moonroof

switch, you can close the sunroof manually.

1. Remove the plug on the roof trim located to the rear

of the moonroof by inserting the end of the regular

scredriver between the roof and plug and prying it off.

2. Insert a hex-headed wrench in the end of the motor

shaft.

To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counterclock-

wise.

Have your vehicle checked and repaired by an autho-

rized SUBARU dealer.

HS9022CA

HS9022BA

9-19

In case of emergency

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following mainte-

nance tools:

Screwdriver

Wheel nut wrench

Hex-head wrench (for vehicle with moonroof)

Jack and jack handle

The jack is stored under the left side of the cargo floor.

US9522AA

HS9006BA

9-20

In case of emergency

The jack handle is stowed under the rear-left and cen-

ter lids in the cargo area.

For how to use the jack, refer to the “Flat tires” section.

HS9007BA

10-1

Appearance care

Exterior care .................................................. 10-2

Washing ............................................................. 10-2

Waxing and polishing ....................................... 10-3

Cleaning aluminum wheels .............................. 10-3

Corrosion protection .................................... 10-4

Most common causes of corrosion ................ 10-4

To help prevent corrosion ............................... 10-5

Cleaning the interior ..................................... 10-6

Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-6

Leather seat materials ...................................... 10-6

Synthetic leather upholstery ........................... 10-6

Ashtray .............................................................. 10-7

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, switches, combination

meter, and other plastic surfaces ................. 10-7

10-2

Appearance care

Appear ance care

Exterior care

Washing

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s beauty is fre-

quent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a

month to avoid contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of luke-

warm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot

water and in direct sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings

should be washed off by using a light detergent, as re-

quired. If you use a light detergent, make certain that

it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or

chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be

promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to

dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a

chamois or soft cloth.

When washing the vehicle, the brakes may

get wet. As a result, the brake stopping dis-

tance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the

vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing

the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

Do not wash the engine compartment and

area adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air

intake, electrical parts or the power steering flu-

id reservoir, it will cause engine trouble or

faulty power steering respectively.

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in an automatic

car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash

is of suitable type. Automatic car wash brushes or

other equipment may damage the rear wiper and

roof spoiler (if equipped).

Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road sur-

faces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corro-

sion of underbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the

fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent inter-

vals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components

may accelerate their corrosion.

After driving off-road or muddy or sandy roads, wash

the mud and sand off the underbody.

10-3

Appearance care

– CONTINUED –

Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they

are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not

use a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

NOTE

Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor har-

nesses, and other parts when washing suspen-

sion components.

Using a warm water washer

Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) or more be-

tween the washer nozzle and the vehicle.

Do not wash the same area continuously.

If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand.

Some warm water washers are of the high tempera-

ture, high pressure type, and they can damage or de-

form the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause wa-

ter to leak into the vehicle.

Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and

polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them ac-

cording to the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or pol-

ish when the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as

the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface

leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens

the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended

that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or

whenever the surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the

point where the luster or tone cannot be restored,

lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained com-

pound. Never polish just the affected area, but include

the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only

one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recom-

mended. Never use a coarse-grained compound.

Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size

number and could damage the paint. After polishing

with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original

luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an in-

correct polishing technique will result in removing the

paint layer and exposing the undercoat. When in

doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU deal-

er or an auto paint specialist.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield washer noz-

zles with wax when waxing the vehicle.

Cleaning aluminum wheels

Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any

kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may

10-4

Appearance care

be difficult to clean off.

Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels.

Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse

thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing

device.

Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels)

with water as soon as possible when it has been

splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist

corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes

have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help

maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable oper-

ation.

Most common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion are:

1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and de-

bris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings

caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:

1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals,

or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the

air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial

pollution.

2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially

when temperatures range just above freezing.

3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains

for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle

may be dry.

4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of

the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of

10-5

Appearance care

– CONTINUED –

proper ventilation.

To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the

body and suspension components. Also, wash the ve-

hicle promptly after driving on any of the following sur-

faces:

roads that have been salted to prevent them from

freezing in winter

mud, sand, or gravel

coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the

underbody be given a very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of

underbody components, such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steer-

ing system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are

found to be rusted, they should be given an appropri-

ate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced.

Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of

maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you

find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt ac-

cumulation under the floor mats because that could

cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats

to make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a

damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, cor-

rosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage

when wet or covered with snow, that can cause damp-

ness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in ar-

eas where road salts and other corrosive materials are

used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and

hood latch should be inspected and lubricated period-

ically.

10-6

Appearance care

Cleaning the interior

Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust and dirt.

Wipe the vinyl areas with a clean, damp cloth.

Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum

cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to re-

move with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft blush then

vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and

dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty,

wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water

then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-

available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden

place and make sure it does not affect the fabric ad-

versely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.

Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural

product which will retain its distinctive appearance and

feel for many years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can

cause the material to become brittle and to wear pre-

maturely. Regular cleaning with a soft, moist, natural

fiber cloth should be performed monthly, taking care

not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the

stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics

may be used to remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with

a soft, dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If your

SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sun-

light, it is recommended that the seats and headrests

be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treat-

ed with a commercial leather spray lacquer. You will

discover that each leather seat section will develop

soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of genu-

ine leather.

Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU

may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and wa-

ter, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt.

Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type

cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may

be used when necessary.

10-7

Appearance care

– CONTINUED –

Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint

thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never

be used on leather or synthetic interior materials.

Ashtray

Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around

the hinges of the ashtray’s inner lid. Clean them off us-

ing a toothbrush or other narrow-ended implement.

Climate control panel, audio panel, in-

strument panel, console panel, switch-

es, combination meter, and other plas-

tic surfaces

Gently wipe away contamination using a clean, soft

cloth moistened with cold or lukewarm water.

NOTE

Do not use organic solvents such as paint thin-

ners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that

contain those solvents.

US6060BA

11-1

Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule ................................. 11-3

Maintenance precautions ............................ 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment .................................................. 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the

engine compartment while the engine is

running ............................................................ 11-5

Engine hood .................................................. 11-5

Engine compartment overview ................... 11-8

2.5 liter non-turbo model .................................. 11-8

2.5 liter turbo model .......................................... 11-9

Engine oil ...................................................... 11-10

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-10

Changing the oil and oil filter .......................... 11-11

Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-13

Recommended grade and viscosity under

severe driving conditions .............................. 11-15

Synthetic oil ....................................................... 11-15

Cooling system ............................................. 11-15

Cooling fan, hose and connections ................ 11-16

Engine coolant .................................................. 11-16

Air cleaner element ...................................... 11-20

Replacing the air cleaner element ................... 11-20

Spark plugs ................................................... 11-23

Recommended spark plugs ............................. 11-24

Drive belts ..................................................... 11-24

Manual transmission oil ............................... 11-25

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-25

Recommended grade and viscosity ................ 11-26

Automatic transmission fluid ...................... 11-27

Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-27

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-29

Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ...... 11-30

Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-30

Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-30

Rear differential gear oil ............................... 11-31

Checking the gear oil level .............................. 11-31

Recommended grade and viscosity ............... 11-32

Power steering fluid ...................................... 11-33

Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-33

Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-34

Brake fluid ..................................................... 11-34

Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-34

Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-35

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) ............................ 11-35

Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-35

Recommended clutch fluid .............................. 11-36

Brake booster ................................................ 11-36

Brake pedal .................................................... 11-37

Checking the brake pedal free play ................ 11-37

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ... 11-37

Clutch pedal (MT vehicles) ........................... 11-38

Checking the clutch function .......................... 11-38

Checking the clutch pedal free play ............... 11-38

Hill holder (MT vehicles — if equipped) ...... 11-39

Replacement of brake pad and lining ......... 11-39

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings .... 11-40

Parking brake stroke .................................... 11-41

11-2

Maintenance and service

Tires and wheels .......................................... 11-41

Types of tires .................................................... 11-41

Tire inspection .................................................. 11-42

Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-42

Wheel balance ................................................... 11-45

Wear indicators ................................................. 11-45

Tire rotation ....................................................... 11-46

Tire replacement ............................................... 11-47

Wheel replacement ........................................... 11-47

Aluminum wheels (If equipped) .................. 11-48

Windshield washer fluid .............................. 11-49

Replacement of wiper blades ...................... 11-50

Windshield wiper blades .................................. 11-50

Rear window wiper blade ................................. 11-53

Battery ........................................................... 11-56

Fuses ............................................................. 11-58

Main fuse ....................................................... 11-60

Installation of accessories .......................... 11-61

Replacing bulbs ............................................ 11-62

Headlight ........................................................... 11-63

Front turn signal, side marker light and

parking lights ................................................. 11-65

Front fog light ................................................... 11-69

Rear combination lights ................................... 11-69

License plate light ............................................ 11-70

Dome light, map light and cargo area light .... 11-71

High mount stop light ...................................... 11-72

11-3

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule

The scheduled maintenance items required to be ser-

viced at regular intervals are shown in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.

For details of your maintenance schedule, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are required, it is rec-

ommended that all work be done by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service by yourself,

you should familiarize yourself with the information

provided in this section on general maintenance and

service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper

or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by

improper maintenance and service performed by you

are not eligible for warranty coverage.

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must

NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dy-

namometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to

do so will result in transmission damage and in

uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause

an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

Always select a safe area when performing

maintenance on your vehicle.

Always be very careful to avoid injury when

working on the vehicle. Remember that some of

11-4

Maintenance and service

the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if

improperly used or handled, for example, bat-

tery acid.

Your vehicle should only be serviced by per-

sons fully competent to do so. Serious person-

al injury may result to persons not experienced

in servicing vehicles.

Always use the proper tools and make certain

that they are well maintained.

Never get under the vehicle supported only

by a jack. Always use a safety stands to sup-

port the vehicle.

Never keep the engine running in a poorly

ventilated area, such as a garage or other

closed areas.

Do not smoke or allow open flames around

the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.

Because the fuel system is under pressure,

replacement of the fuel filter should be per-

formed only by your SUBARU dealer.

Wear adequate eye protection to guard

against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If

something does get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS air-

bag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or

attempt to take its connectors apart, as that

may activate the system or it can render it inop-

erative. The wiring and connectors of these

systems are yellow for easy identification. NEV-

ER use a circuit tester for these wiring.

If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner

needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

Before checking or servicing in the en-

gine compartment

Always stop the engine and set the parking

brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing.

Always let the engine cool down. Engine

parts become very hot when the engine is run-

ning and remain hot for some time after the en-

gine is stopped.

Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake

fluid or any other fluid on hot engine compo-

nents. This may cause a fire.

Always remove the key from the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly

11-5

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

even when the engine is stopped.

When you do checking or servicing in

the engine compartment while the en-

gine is running

A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your

fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and any other mov-

ing engine parts. Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, re-

turn them to their original positions.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument

panel.

HSB014BA

11-6

Maintenance and service

3. Release the secondary hood release located under

the front grille by moving the lever toward the left.

Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retain-

er and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the

hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop

from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its re-

tainer.

2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 12 in. (30

cm) from the closed position and let it drop.

After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely

locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly

HSB015BA HSB016BA

11-7

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

higher position. Do not push the hood forcibly to close

it. It could deform the metal.

Always check that the hood is properly locked

before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly

open while the vehicle is moving and block

your view, which may cause an accident and

serious bodily injury.

11-8

Maintenance and service

Engine compartment overview

2.5 liter non-turbo model

1234567

8910111213 HSB017BB

1) Manual transmission oil level

gauge (MT) (page 11-25) or Dif-

ferential gear oil level gauge

(AT) (page 11-30)

2) Air cleaner element (page 11-

20)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-

35)

4) Automatic transmission fluid lev-

el gauge (page 11-27)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-

34)

6) Windshield washer tank (page

11-49)

7) Fuse box (page 11-58)

8) Battery (page 11-56)

9) Engine coolant reservoir (page

11-15)

10) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)

11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-

10)

12) Radiator cap (page 11-15)

13) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-33)

11-9

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

2.5 liter turbo model

1235467

8910111213

USB101BB

1) Manual transmission oil level

gauge (MT) (page 11-25) or Dif-

ferential gear oil level gauge

(AT) (page 11-30)

2) Air cleaner element (page 11-

20)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-

35)

4) Automatic transmission fluid lev-

el gauge (page 11-27)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-

34)

6) Windshield washer tank (page

11-49)

7) Fuse box (page 11-58)

8) Battery (page 11-56)

9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-10)

10) Engine coolant reservoir (page

11-15)

11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-

10)

12) Radiator cap (page 11-15)

13) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-33)

11-10

Maintenance and service

Engine oil

Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-

gine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it

again.

3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it

stops with the graphic symbol “ ” on its top ap-

pearing as shown in the illustration.

1) Notch

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on

it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level

up to the upper level.

Use only engine oil with the recommended

grade and viscosity.

Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding

it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause

HSB018BA

UGB082BB

11-11

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.

If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine,

wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

pan before checking the level.

Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the en-

gine oil level reading may be in a range between the

upper level and the notch mark. This is caused by ther-

mal expansion of the engine oil.

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any

additional oil above the upper level when the engine is

cold.

Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to the mainte-

nance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more fre-

quently than listed in the maintenance schedule when

driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently

made, when towing a trailer, or when driving in ex-

tremely cold whether.

1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for

about 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-

gine.

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

4. Open the access cover by removing the six clips

and turning the access cover counterclockwise. The

drain plug will be exposed.

HSB025BA

11-12

Maintenance and service

5. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug

while the engine is still warm. The used oil should be

drained into an appropriate container and disposed of

properly.

Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine

oil.

6. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a

clean cloth and tighten it securely with a new sealing

washer after the oil has completely drained out.

7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.

8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of

engine oil to the seal.

9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the bottom of

engine and install the oil filter by hand turning. Be

careful not to twist or damage the seal.

10.Tighten it approximately two-thirds of a turn after

the seal makes contact with the bottom of engine.

Never over tighten the oil filter because that can

result in an oil leak.

HSB020DA HSB020EA

11-13

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

11.Close the access cover by turning it clockwise and

reinstall the six clips in their original positions.

12.Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

Oil quantity (guideline):

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

The oil quantity indicated above is only a guideline.

The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity

of oil that has been drained. The quantity of drained oil

differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil

and the time the oil is left flowing out. After pouring oil

into the engine, therefore, you must use the dipstick to

confirm that the level is correct.

13.Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks ap-

pear around the filter’s rubber seal.

14.Run the engine until it reaches the normal operat-

ing temperature. Then stop the engine and wait a few

minutes to allow the oil drain back. Check the oil level

again and if necessary, add more engine oil.

Recommended grade and viscosity

Oil grade:

ILSAC GF-3, which can be identified with the new

API certification mark (Starburst mark)

or API classification SL with the words “ENERGY

CONSERVING” (if you cannot obtain the oil with

SL grade, you may use SJ grade “ENERGY CON-

SERVING” oil).

These recommended oil grades can be identified by

looking for either or both of the following marks dis-

played on the oil container.

API Service label

1) Indicates the oil quality by API designations

2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade

3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving capabilities

SAE

5W 30

3HSB022BB

11-14

Maintenance and service

New API Certification Mark (Starburst Mark)

In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and vis-

cosity, as well as one that will add to fuel economy.

The following table lists the recommended viscosities

and applicable temperatures.

When adding oil, different brands may be used togeth-

er as long as they are the same API classification and

SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.

SAE viscosity number and applicable temperature

*: 5W-30 is preferred.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy.

Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy.

However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is re-

quired to properly lubricate the engine.

Use only engine oil with the recommended

grade and viscosity.

HSB023AA

5W-30*

10W-30, 10W-40

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 06020 80 10040

UGB084BA

11-15

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Recommended grade and viscosity

under severe driving conditions

If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very

high temperatures, or used for heavy-duty applica-

tions such as towing a trailer, use of oil with the follow-

ing grade and viscosities is recommended.

API classification SL (or SJ):

SAE viscosity No.:

30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50

Synthetic oil

You can use synthetic engine oil that meets the same

requirements given for conventional engine oil. When

using synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same clas-

sification, viscosity and grade shown in this owner’s

manual, and must follow the oil and filter changing in-

tervals shown in the maintenance schedule.

Cooling system

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has cooled

down completely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a

spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re-

moved.

The cooling system has been filled at the facto-

ry with a high quality, corrosion-inhibiting,

year-around coolant which provides protection

against freezing down to –33°F (–36°C). For

adding, use genuine SUBARU coolant or an

equivalent: a mixture of 50% soft water and 50%

ethylene-glycol basis coolant. Use of improper

coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling

system. It is important to maintain protection

against freezing and corrosion, even if freezing

temperatures are not expected. Never mix dif-

ferent kinds of coolant.

11-16

Maintenance and service

Cooling fan, hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is

thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine

coolant reaches a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when

the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the

normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system

checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may

be a leak in the engine cooling system. It is recom-

mended that the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

Engine coolant

Checking the coolant level

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reser-

voir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the “LOW” level

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” level mark. If the

reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and re-

fill as required.

HSB018CB

11-17

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

1) Rubber gaskets

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, re-

install the caps and check that the rubber gaskets in-

side the radiator cap are in the proper position.

Be careful not to spill engine coolant when

adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it

may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.

Do not splash the engine coolant over paint-

ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine

coolant may damage the paint surface.

Changing the coolant

1) Drain plug

Change the engine coolant using the following proce-

dures according to the maintenance schedule.

1. Remove the under cover.

2. Place a proper container under the drain plug and

loosen the drain plug.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from

the radiator. Then drain the coolant from the reserve

tank. Tighten the drain plug securely.

HSB026BB

1HSB027BB

11-18

Maintenance and service

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has cooled

down completely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a

spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is re-

moved.

4. Install the under cover.

Non-turbo models

1) Filler neck

2) Fill up to this level

Turbo models

1) Filler neck

2) Fill up to this level

5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill to the radiator filler

neck. Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as this may

lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the

system.

HSB028BB

2USB518BB

11-19

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Guideline of coolant quantity (including coolant in reservoir

tank):

Non-turbo models:

MT. 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)

AT. 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)

Turbo models:

MT. 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

AT. 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tank’s

“FULL” level mark.

Be careful not to spill engine coolant when

adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it

may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire.

Do not splash the engine coolant over paint-

ed parts. The alcohol contained in the engine

coolant may damage the paint surface.

1) Rubber gaskets

7. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At

this time, make sure that the rubber gasket in the radi-

HSB018CB

HSB026BB

11-20

Maintenance and service

ator cap is correctly in place.

8. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes

at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.

9. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools

down (122 to 140°F [50 to 60°C]). If there is any loss

of coolant, add coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and

to the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.

10.Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and

tighten firmly.

Air cleaner element

The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen.

When the element is perforated or removed, engine

wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnec-

essary to clean or wash the element.

Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner

element removed. The air cleaner element not

only filters intake air but also stops flames if the

engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is

not installed when the engine backfires, you

could be burned.

Replacing the air cleaner element

Non-turbo models

Replace the air cleaner element according to the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”. Under extremely dusty conditions, re-

place it more frequently. It is recommended that you

always use genuine SUBARU parts.

11-21

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

1) Bolt

1. Remove the bolt securing the rear air cleaner ele-

ment case.

2. Unsnap the three clamps holding the rear air clean-

er element case.

1) Air cleaner element

3. Separate the rear air cleaner element case from

the front cleaner element case and remove the air

cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the front and rear air cleaner el-

ement cases with a damp cloth and install a new air

cleaner element.

5. Insert the four projections on the rear air cleaner el-

ement case into the slits on the front air cleaner ele-

ment case and snap the three clamps on the rear air

cleaner element case and then tighten the bolt.

HSB030BB

HSB031BB

11-22

Maintenance and service

Turbo models

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner

case cover.

1) Air cleaner case cover

2) Air cleaner element

2. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air

cleaner element.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case

with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner ele-

ment.

USB521BA

USB522BB

11-23

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

4. To install the air cleaner case cover, insert the two

projections on the air cleaner case cover into the slits

on the air cleaner case and then snap the two clamps

on the air cleaner case cover.

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is rec-

ommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by

your SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced according to the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

When disconnecting the spark plug cables,

always grasp the spark plug cap, not the ca-

USB523BA

HSB032BA

11-24

Maintenance and service

bles.

Make sure the cables are replaced in the cor-

rect order.

Recommended spark plugs

Non-turbo models:

RC10YC4 (Champion)

BKR6E-11 (NGK)

BKR5E-11 (NGK)

Turbo models:

IFLR6B (NGK)

Drive belts

1) Power steering pump pulley

2) Air conditioner compressor pulley

3) Crank pulley

The alternator, power steering pump, and air condi-

tioner compressor depend on drive belts. Satisfactory

performance requires that belt tension be correct.

To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler)

across two adjacent pulleys and apply a force of 22 lb

(98 N, 10 kg) midway between the pulleys by using a

spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount

specified. If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact

HSB033BB

11-25

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

your SUBARU dealer.

in (mm)

Manual transmission oil

Checking the oil level

Non-turbo models:

1) Yellow handle

Deflection

New belt Used belt

A 0.28 — 0.35 (7.0 — 9.0) 0.35 — 0.43 (9.0 — 11.0)

B 0.30 — 0.33 (7.5 — 8.5) 0.35 — 0.40 (9.0 — 10.0)

HSB018DB

11-26

Maintenance and service

Turbo models

Check the oil level monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-

gine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it

again.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on

it. If it is below the lower level, add oil through the dip-

stick hole to bring the level up to the upper level.

Recommended grade and viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-

tives. Never use different brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

HSB018LA

USB526BB

11-27

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature

Automatic transmission fluid

Checking the fluid level

The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as

its temperature rises; the fluid level differs according to

fluid temperature. Therefore, there are two different

scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid

on the dipstick.

Though the fluid level can be checked without warm-

ing up the fluid on the “COLD” range, we recommend

checking the fluid level when the fluid is at operating

temperature.

Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot

Check the fluid level monthly.

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temper-

ature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating

temperature; 154 to 176°F (70 to 80°C) is normal.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the park-

ing brake.

3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then

shift it in the “P” position, and run the engine at idling

speed.

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

HSB036BA

11-28

Maintenance and service

Non-turbo models

1) Yellow handle

Turbo models

1) Yellow handle

HSB018JB

HSB018MB

11-29

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

A) HOT range

B) COLD range

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the

gauge. If it is below the lower level on the “HOT”

range, add the recommended automatic transmission

fluid up to the upper level.

Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold

When the fluid level has to be checked without time to

warm up the automatic transmission, check to see that

the fluid level is between the lower level and upper lev-

el on the “COLD” range. If it is below that range, add

fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.

Recommended fluid

“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid

HGB061BB

11-30

Maintenance and service

Front differential gear oil (AT vehi-

cles)

Checking the oil level

1) Yellow handle

Check the differential oil level monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the en-

gine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it

again.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on

it. If it is below the lower level, add oil to bring the level

up to the upper level.

Recommended grade and viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-

tives. Never use different brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

HSB018FB

HSB040BB

11-31

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature

Rear differential gear oil

Checking the gear oil level

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential

protector. The differential protector provides protec-

tion to the rear differential assembly during off-road

use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not re-

quired when checking the oil level.

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

HSB036BA

HSB042BB

11-32

Maintenance and service

1) Filler hole

2) Drain hole

3) Oil level

Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil

level. The oil level should be kept even with the bottom

of the filler hole. If the oil level is below the bottom

edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise

the level.

If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there

may be an oil leak. If you suspect a problem,

have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU deal-

er.

Recommended grade and viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and addi-

tives. Never use different brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature

HSB043BB -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

HSB036BA

11-33

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Power steering fluid

Checking the fluid level

1) Reservoir tank

The power steering fluid expands greatly as its tem-

perature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid

temperature. Therefore, the reservoir tank has two dif-

ferent checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.

Check the power steering fluid level monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the en-

gine.

1) Specified range

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir tank.

When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run:

Check that the oil level is between “HOT MIN” and

“HOT MAX” on the surface of the reservoir tank.

When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run: Check

that the oil level is between “COLD MIN” and “COLD

MAX” on the surface of the reservoir tank.

3. If the fluid level is lower than the applicable “MIN”

line, add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring

the level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible

leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer for inspection.

HSB044BB

HSB045BB

11-34

Maintenance and service

Be careful not to burn yourself because the flu-

id may be hot.

When power steering fluid is being added,

use only clean fluid, and be careful not to allow

any dirt into the tank. And never use different

brands together.

Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.

Recommended fluid

“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid

Brake fluid

Checking the fluid level

1) “MAX” level mark

2) “MIN” level mark

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If

the level is below “MIN”, add the recommended brake

fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.

MAX

MIN

HSB018GB

11-35

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air.

Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous

loss of braking performance.

If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there

may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have

the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

Never use different brands of brake fluid to-

gether.

When adding brake fluid, be careful not to al-

low any dirt into the reservoir.

Never splash the brake fluid over painted sur-

faces or rubber parts. Alcohol contained in the

brake fluid may damage them.

Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)

Checking the fluid level

1) “MAX” level mark

2) “MIN” level mark

Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If

the level is below “MIN” level mark, add the recom-

mended clutch fluid to “MAX” level mark.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.

Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air.

HSB018NB

11-36

Maintenance and service

Any absorbed moisture can cause improper

clutch operation.

If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there

may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have

the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

Never use different brands of clutch fluid to-

gether.

When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to

allow any dirt into the tank.

Recommended clutch fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as described be-

low, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal sever-

al times, applying the same pedal force each time. The

distance the pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine.

The pedal should move slightly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine

and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. The

pedal height should not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute

then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times

to check the brake booster. Brake booster operates

properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each de-

pression.

11-37

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance

according to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Checking the brake pedal free play

1) 0.04 – 0.12 in (1.0 – 3.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal

several times. Lightly press the brake pedal down with

one finger to check the free play with a force of less

than 2 lb (10 N, 1 kg).

If the free play is not within proper specification, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

Checking the brake pedal reserve dis-

tance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lb

(294 N, 30 kg) and measure the distance between the

upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than the specifica-

tion, or when the pedal does not operate smoothly,

contact with your SUBARU dealer.

HSB049BB

HSB050BB

11-38

Maintenance and service

Clutch pedal (MT vehicles)

Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance

according to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there are no ab-

normal noises when the clutch pedal is depressed,

and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to

check that the engine and transmission smoothly cou-

ple without any sign of slippage.

Checking the clutch pedal free play

1) 0.16 – 0.51 in (4.0 –13.0 mm)

Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger

until you feel resistance, and check the free play.

If the free play is not within proper specification, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

HSB049BB

11-39

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Hill holder (MT vehicles — if

equipped)

Ensure that the hill holder operates properly under the

following circumstances:

1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by depressing

the brake pedal and clutch pedal, with the engine run-

ning.

2. Make sure that the vehicle does not move back-

ward even after the brake pedal is released.

3. Then make sure the vehicle starts climbing the

grade by following the normal starting procedures.

If the hill holder does not operate as described above,

contact with your SUBARU dealer.

Replacement of brake pad and lining

The front disc brakes and the right rear disc brake

have an audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If

the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise

when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the

brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

HS7012BA

11-40

Maintenance and service

If you continue to drive despite the scraping

noise from the audible brake pad wear indica-

tor, it will result in the need for costly brake ro-

tor repair or replacement.

Breaking-in of new brake pads and lin-

ings

When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only gen-

uine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts

must be broken in as follows:

Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65

km/h), step on the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five

or more times.

Parking brake lining

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35

km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button pushed in,

pull the parking brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY.

(Pulling with a force of approximately 33 lb [147 N, 15

kg].)

3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters)

in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool

down. Repeat this procedure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking

brake stroke is out of the specified range, adjust it by

turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake

lever.

Parking brake stroke:

7 – 8 notches / 44 lb (196 N, 20 kg)

A safe location and situation should be select-

ed for break-in driving.

Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully

may cause the rear wheels to lock. To avoid

this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly and

gently.

11-41

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”. When the parking brake is properly adjusted,

braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up

seven to eight notches gently but firmly (about 44 lb,

196 N, 20 kg). If the parking brake lever stroke is not

within the specified range, have the brake system

checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.

Tires and wheels

Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires present on

your vehicle.

All season tires

The factory-installed tires on your new vehicle are all

season tires.

All season tires are designed to provide an adequate

measure of traction, handling and braking perfor-

mance in year-round driving including snowy and icy

road conditions. However all season tires do not offer

as much traction performance as winter (snow) tires in

heavy or loose snow or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL SEASON” and/

or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.

Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suit-

ed for highway driving under dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery

roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads,

we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four

tires.

HS7014CA

11-42

Maintenance and service

Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-cov-

ered and icy roads. However winter tires do not per-

form as well as summer tires and all season tires on

roads other than snow-covered and icy roads.

Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from se-

rious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find

any problem.

NOTE

When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are

subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle

is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer dam-

age that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This

type of damage does not become evident until

time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, pot-

holes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is un-

avoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed down to a

walking pace or less, and approach the curbs as

squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are

not pressed against the curb when you park the

vehicle.

If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find

it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one

of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive

slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer

and have the vehicle inspected.

Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maxi-

mize the tires’ service lives and is essential for good

running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least

once a month (for example, during a fuel stop) and be-

fore any long journey.

Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use

HS8024BA

11-43

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the

values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is lo-

cated on the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and

increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures

are affected by the ambient temperature. It is best to

check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehi-

cle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands,

causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to

mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

NOTE

The air pressure in a tire increases by approxi-

mately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kg/cm2) when the tire

becomes warm.

The tires are considered cold when the vehicle

has been parked for at least three hours or has

been driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust press-

rue. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and

ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnor-

mally.

Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Roll-

ing resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also low-

er.

HSB052AA

11-44

Maintenance and service

Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at

shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also

higher.

Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in cen-

ter)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the ef-

fects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly result-

ing in vehicle damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pressures for the vehicle

when fully loaded and for the vehicle when towing a

trailer, adjust the tire pressures to the values that

match current loading conditions.

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire

pressures can cause the tires to deform severe-

HSB053AA HSB054AA

11-45

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

ly and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase

in temperature could cause tread separation,

and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss

of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle

was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as

the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance

causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain

vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle’s

straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and

suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear.

If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly bal-

anced, have them checked and adjusted by your

SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire re-

pairs and after tire rotation.

NOTE

Loss of correct wheel alignment* causes the tires

to wear on one side and reduces the vehicle’s run-

ning stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you

notice abnormal tire wear.

*: The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at

a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the

road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering perfor-

mance.

Wear indicators

A) New tread

B) Worn tread

1) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which

becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves

decreases to 0.063 in. (1.6 mm). A tire must be re-

placed when the tread wear indicator appears as a

solid band across the tread.

A1B

HSB055BB

11-46

Maintenance and service

When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes vis-

ible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately. With a tire

in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet

weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane.

The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to

an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread regularly and replace

the tires before their tread wear indicators become

visible.

Tire rotation

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the

life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniform-

ly, it is best to rotate the tires every 7,500 miles

(12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the

front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle

and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the

left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept

on its original side of the vehicle.)

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the

time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-

sures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened.

HSB056BA

11-47

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km),

check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that

has become loose.

Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and integral parts

of your vehicle’s design; they cannot be changed arbi-

trarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are opti-

mally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and

were selected to give the best possible combination of

running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It

is essential for every tire to have a size and construc-

tion matching those shown on the tire placard and to

have a speed symbol and load index matching those

shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from con-

trollability, ride comfort, braking performance, speed-

ometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also cre-

ates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropri-

ately changes the vehicle’s ground clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of manufactur-

er, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You

are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equipment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends re-

placing all four tires at the same time.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construc-

tion, degree of wear, speed symbol, load index

and size. Mixing tires of different types, sizes or

degrees of wear can result in damage to vehi-

cle’s power train. Use of different types or sizes

of tires can also dangerously reduce controlla-

bility and braking performance and can lead to

an accident.

Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires

together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply

tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce control-

lability, resulting in an accident.

Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage,

make sure the replacement wheels match the

specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard

equipment. Replacement wheels are available from

SUBARU dealers.

11-48

Maintenance and service

Use only those wheels that are specified for

your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifica-

tions could interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub against the

wheel well housing during turns. The resulting

loss of vehicle control could lead to an acci-

dent.

Aluminum wheels (If equipped)

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged

easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appear-

ance, performance, and safety.

When any of the wheels is removed and replaced

for tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the

tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately

600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to

the specified torque.

Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or

tapered surface of the wheel.

Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or

curbs.

Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely

around the tire, otherwise the chains may scratch the

wheel.

When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center

cap is replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine

SUBARU parts designed for aluminum wheels.

11-49

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Windshield washer fluid

Check the level of the washer fluid at each fuel stop. If

the level is low, fill the fluid up to the neck of the reser-

voir.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid

is unavailable use clean water.

In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-

freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Wind-

shield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol

and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper-

ature varies according to how much it is diluted, as in-

dicated below.

Never use engine coolant as washer fluid be-

cause it could cause paint damage.

HSB018IA

Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature

30% 10.4°F (–12°C)

50% –4°F (–20°C)

100% –49°F (–45°C)

11-50

Maintenance and service

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the wind-

shield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper opera-

tion and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove

the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of

the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades

using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wind-

shield and wiper blades with clean water. The wind-

shield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the

windshield with water.

Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or

a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzene.

This will cause deterioration of the wiper

blades.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after follow-

ing this method, replace the wiper blades using the fol-

lowing procedures:

Windshield wiper blades

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

1) Stopper

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its

pivot area and pushing it in the direction shown by the

arrow while depressing the wiper blade stopper.

HSB058CB

11-51

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

1) Metal support

3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly

and pull it firmly until the stoppers on the rubber are

free of the metal support.

1) Metal spines

4. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two

metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old

blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.

HSB059BB

HSB060BB

11-52

Maintenance and service

5. Align the claws of the metal support with the

grooves in the rubber and slide the blade rubber as-

sembly into the metal support until it locks.

1) Stopper

Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal

support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown.

If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper blade

may scratch the windshield.

6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm.

Make sure that it locks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm.

HSB061BA

HSB062BB

11-53

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.

3. Having turned the wiper blade assembly to the an-

gle shown in the illustration, pull it in the direction of

the arrow to remove it from the wiper arm.

USB581BA

USB582BA

11-54

Maintenance and service

1) Plastic support

4. Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly to un-

lock it from the plastic support.

5. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic

support.

USB585BB USB586BA

11-55

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

1) Metal spines

6. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two

metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old

blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.

7. Align the claws of the plastic support with the

grooves in the blade rubber assembly, then slide the

blade rubber assembly into place.

USB583BB USB586CA

11-56

Maintenance and service

Securely lock the end of the plastic support as shown

in the illustration. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window glass.

8. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm.

Make sure that it locks in place.

9. Lower the wiper arm.

Battery

Before beginning work on or near any bat-

tery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, match-

es, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off

a gas which is highly flammable and explosive.

For safety, in case an explosion does occur,

wear eye protection or shield your eyes when

working near any battery. Never lean over a bat-

tery.

Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin,

fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a cor-

rosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or

in your eyes, immediately flush the area with

water thoroughly. Seek medical help immedi-

ately if acid has entered the eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, imme-

diately drink a large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention immediately.

To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings,

metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry.

Never allow metal tools to contact the positive

battery terminal and anything connected to it

WHILE you are at the same time in contact with

USB584BA

11-57

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

any other metallic portion of the vehicle be-

cause a short circuit will result.

Keep everyone including children away from

the battery.

Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.

Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-

ries contain lead and lead compounds, chemi-

cals known to the State of California to cause

cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands af-

ter handling.

1) Cap

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid

level or periodically refill with distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below the lower

level, remove the cap. Fill to the upper level with dis-

tilled water.

Never use more than 10 amperes when charg-

ing the battery because it will shorten battery

life.

UPPER LEVEL

WER LEVEL

3HSB063BB

11-58

Maintenance and service

Fuses

Never replace a fuse with one having a higher

rating or with material other than a fuse be-

cause serious damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to

prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical

equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel behind the

coin tray on the driver’s seat side.

To remove the coin tray, open the cover and pull the

coin tray out.

The other one is housed in the engine compartment.

HSB064BA

HSB065BA

11-59

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

1) Fuse puller

2) Spare fuse

The fuse puller and spare fuses are stored in the main

fuse box cover in the engine compartment.

A) Good

B) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do

not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse

has blown, replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and

turn off all electrical accessories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side

of each fuse box cover and the “Fuses and circuits”

section in chapter 12 in this manual show the circuit for

each fuse.

2HSB066BB

HSB067BB

11-60

Maintenance and service

1) Fuse puller

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a

spare fuse of the same rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its

system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for repairs.

Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are designed to melt during an over-

load to prevent damage to the wiring harness and

electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any elec-

trical component fails to operate (except the starter

motor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse

must be replaced. Use only replacements with the

same specified rating as the melted main fuse. If a

main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical

system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

HSB068BB

HSB065BA

11-61

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing

fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your ve-

hicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic sys-

tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if

they are not suited for the vehicle.

11-62

Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs

4321

567

14 HSB069BB

Wattage Bulb No.

1) Headlight 12V–60/

55W

HB2 (H4)

2) Parking light 12V–5W 168

3) Map light 12V–8W —

4) Dome light 12V–8W —

5) Side marker light

(Front)

12V–5W 168

6) Front turn signal 12V–21W

(Amber)

1474

7) Front fog light 12V–55W —

8) High mount stop light 12V–13W 912

9) Cargo area light 12V–15W —

10) Tail/stop light 12V–21/

7443

11) Rear turn signal 12V–21W

(Amber)

1474

12) Backup light 12V–16W 921

13) Tail/stop light 12V–21/

7443

14) Licence plate light 12V–5W 168

11-63

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Headlight

Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while

in use. If you touch the bulb surface with bare

hands or greasy gloves, finger prints or grease

on the bulb surface will develop into hot spots

and cause the bulb to break. If there are finger

prints or grease on the bulb surface, wipe them

away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.

NOTE

If headlight aiming is required, consult your

SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the head-

light aim.

1) Rubber cover

2) Electrical connector

3) “Top” mark

1. Disconnect the electrical connector, then remove

the rubber cover.

HSB070BB

11-64

Maintenance and service

1) Retainer spring

2) Bulb

2. Remove the retainer spring. Remove the bulb from

the headlight assembly.

3. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.

4. Install the new bulb, then set the retainer spring se-

curely.

5. Install the rubber cover with the top mark facing up,

then reconnect the electrical connector.

HSB071BB HSB072BA

11-65

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Front turn signal, side marker light and

parking lights

1) Front turn signal light

2) Parking light

3) Front side marker light

The headlight assembly must be removed before the

parking light and front turn signal light bulbs can be re-

placed. When the headlight assembly has been re-

moved and then reinstalled, it may become necessary

to make a headlight aiming adjustment. It may be dif-

ficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer

replace the bulbs if necessary.

: Clip

: Hook

HSB073BB

HSB074BA

11-66

Maintenance and service

1. Remove the front grille. Use a screwdriver to de-

tach the four clips at the top and the three hooks on the

left, right and center.

2. Remove the grille side cover by undoing the two

clips and sliding the grille side cover toward the head-

light.

HSB075BA HSB076BA

11-67

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

3. Remove three bolts. 1) Rubber cover

2) Electrical connector

3) “Top” mark

4. Disconnect the connectors from the headlight as-

sembly.

HSB078BA HSB070BB

11-68

Maintenance and service

5. Pull the headlight assembly slightly toward you,

then hold down the lock release tabs on the connec-

tors for the front turn signal light, parking light, and

front side marker light and pull out the headlight as-

sembly completely.

6. Remove the bulb socket from the headlight assem-

bly by turning it counterclockwise.

HSB079BA HSB073CA

11-69

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

7. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.

8. Set the bulb socket into the headlight assembly and

turn it clockwise until it locks.

9. Reinstall all the removed parts by following the re-

moval sequence in reverse.

Front fog light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your

SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary.

Rear combination lights

1. Remove the upper and lower screws. Then, slide

the rear combination lamp assembly to the rear and

remove it from the vehicle.

HSB080BA

HSB085BA

11-70

Maintenance and service

1) Tail/stop light

2) Rear turn signal light

3) Backup light

4) Tail/stop light

2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination

light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Pull the bulb from the holder. Install a new bulb.

4. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light

assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.

5. Reinstall the rear combination light assembly.

License plate light

1. Remove the mounting screws using a phillips

screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover and lens.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens and cover.

5. Tighten the mounting screws.

HSB086BB

HSB087BA

11-71

Maintenance and service

– CONTINUED –

Dome light, map light and cargo area

light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with

HSB088BA

HSB089BA

HSB090BA

11-72

Maintenance and service

a regular screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

High mount stop light

1. Remove the mounting screw covers by prying the

edge with a screwdriver.

2. Remove the mounting screws using a phillips

screwdriver and then remove the high mount stop light

cover.

3. Pull the bulb from the socket. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the cover.

5. Tighten the mounting screws then reinstall the cov-

ers.

NOTE

Other bulbs may be difficult to replace. Have your

SUBARU dealer replace these bulbs if necessary.

HSB091BA

12-1

Specifications

Specifications ................................................ 12-2

Dimensions ....................................................... 12-2

Engine ................................................................ 12-3

Electrical system .............................................. 12-3

Capacities .......................................................... 12-4

Tires ................................................................... 12-5

Wheel alignment ............................................... 12-5

Fuses and circuits ........................................ 12-6

Fuse panel located behind the coin tray ........ 12-6

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment .................................................. 12-7

Bulb chart ...................................................... 12-8

Vehicle identification .................................... 12-9

12-2

Specifications

Specif ication s

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dimensions

in (mm)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

AT: Automatic transmission

MT: Manual transmission

Item 2.5-liter 2.5-liter (Turbo)

XXS XT

Drive system AWD

Transmission type AT MT AT MT AT MT

Overall length 175.2 (4450)

Overall width 68.3 (1735)

Overall height 62.6 (1590)

Wheel base 99.4 (2525)

Tread Front 58.9 (1495)

Rear 58.5 (1485)

Ground clearance*17.5 (190)

12-3

Specifications

– CONTINUED –

Engine

Electrical system

Engine model EJ251 (2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo) EJ255 (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cu in. (cc) 150 (2,457)

Bore × Stroke in. (mm) 3.92 x 3.11 (99.5 x 79.0)

Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.2 : 1

Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4

Battery type and capacity

(5HR)

Manual transmission 12V-48AH (55D23L)

Automatic transmission 12V-52AH (75D23L)

Alternator 12V – 90A

Spark plugs 2.5-liter non-turbo engine RC10YC4 (Champion)

BKR6E-11 (NGK)

BKR5E-11 (NGK)

2.5-liter turbo engine ILFR6B (NGK)

12-4

Specifications

Capacities

AT: Automatic transmission

MT: Manual transmission

Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

Transmission oil MT 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)

AT 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)

AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)

Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)

Power steering gear fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)

Engine coolant 2.5-liter non-turbo en-

gine models

MT 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)

AT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)

2.5-liter turbo models MT 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

AT 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)

12-5

Specifications

– CONTINUED –

Tires

Wheel alignment

Tire size P215/60R16 94H

Wheel size 16 x 61/2 JJ

Pressure Front Light load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kg/cm2)

Full load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kg/cm2)

Rear Light load 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kg/cm2)

Full load 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kg/cm2)

Trailer towing 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kg/cm2)

Item XXS XT

Drive system AWD

Toe Front 0 ± 0.12 in (0 ± 3 mm)

Rear 0.08 ± 0.12 in (2 ± 3 mm)

Camber Front –0°25’ ± 45’

Rear –0°50’ ± 45’

12-6

Specifications

Fuses and circuits

Fuse panel located behind the coin

tray

123456

7891011 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23

HSC001BB

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

115A Heater fan

215A Heater fan

315A Power door lock

Remote keyless entry

415A Cigarette lighter

Remote controlled rear

view mirrors

510A Tail light

Parking light

615A SRS airbag

715A Fog light

830A ABS

915A Radio

10 Empty

11 15A Engine ignition system

SRS airbag

AT control system

12-7

Specifications

– CONTINUED –

Fuse panel located in the engine com-

partment

A) FWD socket

B) Main fuse

12 10A Illumination brightness

control

13 20A Wiper deicer

Outside mirror defogger

14 10A Meter

15 30A Windshield wiper and

washer

16 20A Brake light

17 15A Air conditioner

18 15A Backup light

Cruise control

19 15A Power outlet (cargo)

20 10A Rear window wiper and

washer

21 Empty

22 15A Seat heater

23 Empty

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

678

91011

HSC002BB

12-8

Specifications

Bulb chart

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

120A Radiator cooling fan

(Main)

220A Radiator cooling fan

(Sub)

330A ABS motor

420A Rear window defogger

515A Hazard warning flasher

Horn

615A Turn signal lights

710A Automatic

transmission control

unit

810A Alternator

915A Headlight (right side)

10 15A Headlight (left side)

11 20A Lighting switch

12 15A Clock

Interior light

Description Wattage Bulb type

Headlight 12V-60/55W HB2

Front fog light 12V-55W —

Front turn signal 12V-21W 1474

Parking light 12V-5W 168

Side marker light (Front) 12V-5W 168

Rear combination light

Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

Turn signal 12V-21W

(Amber)

1474

Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

Back-up light 12V-16W 921

High mount stop light 12V-13W 912

License plate light 12V-5W 168

Cargo compartment light 12V-5W —

Front ashtray light 12V-1.4W —

Doom light 12V-8W —

Map light 12V-8W —

12-9

Specifications

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle identification

USC507BB

1) Vehicle identification number

2) Emission control label

3) Vehicle identification number

plate

4) Tire inflation pressure plate

5) Certification plate

6) Bar cord label (USA only)

7) Model number plate

13-1

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Uniform tire quality grading standards ....... 13-2

Treadwear .......................................................... 13-2

Traction AA, A, B, C .......................................... 13-2

Temperature A, B, C ......................................... 13-3

Reporting safety defects (USA) ................... 13-4

13-2

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A.

The following information has been compiled accord-

ing to Code of Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

Uniform tire quality grading stan-

dards

This information indicates the relative performance of

passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction,

and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consum-

er in making an informed choice in the purchase of

tires.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the

tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum

section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for

use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to

deep tread, winter type snow tires, space-saver or

temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diam-

eters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal Safety

Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and

one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits, service prac-

tices and differences in road characteristics and cli-

mate.

Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,

B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based

13-3

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

– CONTINUED –

on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and

does not include acceleration, cornering, hy-

droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire's resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,

and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet under

the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,

or excessive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat buildup and pos-

sible tire failure.

13-4

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Reporting safety defects (USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause in-

jury or death, you should immediately inform

the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying

Subaru of America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To con-

tact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393

(or 366-0123 in the Washington D.C. area)

or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of

Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

14-1

Index

14-2

Index

ABS ................................................................ 7-23

Warning light ...................................... 3-12, 7-24

Accessory power outlet .................................. 6-9

Active head restraint ....................................... 1-7

Air cleaner element ........................................ 11-20

Air filtration system ......................................... 4-18

Aluminum wheel ............................................. 11-48

Aluminum wheel Cleaning .............................. 10-3

Ambient temperature gauge ........................... 3-9

Antenna system ............................................. 5-2

Anti-lock brake warning light (ABS) ........ 3-12, 7-24

Arming the system .......................................... 2-14

Ashtray ......................................................6-14, 10-7

Audio set ........................................................ 5-3

Auto-dimming mirror/compass ....................... 3-30

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor

(A/ELR) ....................................................... 1-14

Automatic climate control system.................... 4-10

Automatic transmission .................................. 7-14

Capacities .................................................. 12-4

Fluid ........................................................... 11-27

Selector lever ............................................. 7-15

Shift lock release ....................................... 7-19

Temperature warning (AT OIL TEMP) ....... 3-12

Battery ............................................................. 11-56

Jump starting .............................................. 9-9

Replacing (remote keyless entry) ............... 2-9

Brake

Booster ....................................................... 11-36

Fluid ............................................................ 11-34

Pad and lining ............................................. 11-39

Parking ....................................................... 11-41

Pedal .......................................................... 11-37

System ....................................................... 7-22

Warning light .............................................. 3-13

Brake pedal ..................................................... 11-37

Free play .................................................... 11-37

Reserve distance ........................................ 11-37

Braking ............................................................ 7-21

Braking tips ..................................................... 7-21

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ..... 11-40

Bulb

Chart ........................................................... 12-8

Replacing ................................................... 11-62

Capacities ....................................................... 12-4

Cargo area cover (if equipped) ....................... 6-16

Cargo area light ............................................... 6-2

Cargo tie-down hooks ..................................... 6-18

14-3

Index

Center console ............................................... 6-5

Charge warning light ...................................... 3-12

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp ............................................. 3-11

Child restraint systems ................................... 1-32

Installation with seatbelt ............................ 1-36

Top tether anchorages .............................. 1-47

Child safety locks ........................................... 2-20

Chime

Key ............................................................ 3-3

Seat belt .............................................. 1-14, 3-10

Cigarette lighter socket ................................... 6-11

Clock .............................................................. 3-16

Clutch (MT)

Fluid ........................................................... 11-35

Pedal ......................................................... 11-38

Coat hook ....................................................... 6-16

Coil tray .......................................................... 6-7

Convenience net ............................................ 6-7

Coolant ........................................................... 11-16

Cooling system ............................................... 11-15

Corrosion protection ................................. 8-12, 10-4

Cruise control ................................................. 7-31

Cruise control indicator light ........................... 3-16

Cup holders ..................................................... 6-8

Dashboard storage compartment ................... 6-6

Daytime running light system ......................... 3-19

Differential gear oil

Front (AT vehicles) .................................... 11-30

Rear ........................................................... 11-31

Dimensions ..................................................... 12-2

Disarming the system ..................................... 2-16

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ......... 7-22

Dome light ...................................................... 6-2

Door locks ...................................................... 2-3

Door open warning light ................................. 3-15

Drive belt ........................................................ 11-24

Driving in foreign country ................................ 8-6

Driving tips............................................... 7-13, 8-6

Electronic brake force distribution (EBD)

system ......................................................... 7-25

Emergency locking retractor (ELR) ................ 1-13

Engine

Compartment overview .............................. 11-8

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ................ 8-3

Hood .......................................................... 11-5

Oil .............................................................. 11-10

Coolant ...................................................... 11-16

Overheating ............................................... 9-12

14-4

Index

Starting ...................................................... 7-9

Stopping .................................................... 7-11

Exterior care ................................................... 10-2

Flat tires ...................................................... 9-3, 9-5

Floor mat ........................................................ 6-15

Fluid level

Automatic transmission ............................. 11-27

Brake ......................................................... 11-34

Clutch (MT vehicles) .................................. 11-35

Power steering ........................................... 11-33

Fog light switch ............................................... 3-22

Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ........... 11-30

Front seatbelt pretensioners ........................... 1-28

Front seats ..................................................... 1-2

Fore and aft adjustment ............................. 1-3

Reclining .................................................... 1-4

Front-wheel drive warning light (AT vehicles) . 3-15

Fuel ................................................................ 7-2

Economy hints ........................................... 8-2

Filler lid and cap ........................................ 7-4

Gauge ........................................................ 3-7

Requirements ............................................ 7-2

Fuses ............................................................. 11-58

Fuses and circuits .......................................... 12-6

GAWR ............................................................. 8-17

Glove box ........................................................ 6-5

Gross axle weight rating .................................. 8-17

Gross vehicle weight rating ............................. 8-17

GVWR ............................................................. 8-17

Hazard warning flasher ................................... 3-5

Headlight flasher ............................................. 3-19

Headlights ....................................................... 3-18

Headrest adjustment ....................................... 1-10

Heater operation ............................................. 4-6

High beam indicator light ................................. 3-16

Hill holder ................................................ 7-30, 11-39

Horn ................................................................ 3-35

Ignition switch .................................................. 3-2

Illuminated entry .............................................. 2-8

Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-21

Indicator light ................................................... 3-10

Inside mirror .................................................... 3-29

Interior lights .................................................... 6-2

14-5

Index

Jack and jack handle ...................................... 9-19

Jump starting .................................................. 9-9

Key

Number ...................................................... 2-2

Reminder chime ........................................ 3-3

Key interlock release (AT vehicles) ................ 3-4

Keys ............................................................... 2-2

Leather seat materials .................................... 10-6

Light control switch ......................................... 3-17

Limited slip differential (LSD) .......................... 7-20

Loading your vehicle ...................................... 8-14

Lower and tether anchorages ......................... 1-43

Low fuel warning light ..................................... 3-15

LSD (limited slip differential) ........................... 7-20

Lumbar support .............................................. 1-5

Main fuse ........................................................ 11-60

Maintenance

Precautions ................................................ 11-3

Schedule .................................................... 11-3

Seatbelt ..................................................... 1-26

Tools .......................................................... 9-19

Malfunction indicator lamp .............................. 3-11

Manual climate control system ........................ 4-4

Manual transmission ...................................... 7-11

Oil .............................................................. 11-25

Map light ......................................................... 6-3

Maximum load limits ....................................... 8-26

Meters and gears ........................................... 3-5

Mirrors ............................................................ 3-29

Moonroof ................................................ 2-26, 9-18

New vehicle break-in driving .......................... 8-2

Odometer/Trip meter ...................................... 3-5

Off road driving ............................................... 8-8

Oil filter ........................................................... 11-11

Oil level

Engine ....................................................... 11-10

Manual transmission .................................. 11-25

Rear differential ......................................... 11-31

Oil pressure warning light ............................... 3-12

Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-32

Overhead console .......................................... 6-6

14-6

Index

Parking brake ......................................... 7-27, 11-41

Stroke ........................................................ 11-41

Parking light switch ......................................... 3-21

Parking your vehicle ....................................... 7-27

Periodic inspections ....................................... 8-5

Power

Door locking switches ................................ 2-5

Steering ..................................................... 7-21

Steering fluid level ..................................... 11-33

Windows .................................................... 2-21

Rear

Combination lights ..................................... 11-69

Differential gear oil level ............................ 11-31

Gate ................................................... 2-24, 9-17

Seats ......................................................... 1-9

Viscous limited slip differential (LSD) ........ 7-20

Rear window

Defogger switch ......................................... 3-28

Wiper and washer switch ........................... 3-26

Wiper blades .............................................. 11-53

Remote keyless entry system ........................ 2-6

Replacing

Air cleaner element .................................... 11-20

Battery (remote keyless entry) ................... 2-9

Bulbs .......................................................... 11-62

Transmitters ............................................... 2-10

Rocking the vehicle ......................................... 8-14

Roof rail and crossbar ..................................... 8-17

Seatbelt

Extender ..................................................... 1-27

Maintenance ............................................... 1-26

Pretensioners ............................................. 1-28

Safety tips ................................................... 1-12

Warning light and chime ....................... 1-14, 3-10

Seatbelts ......................................................... 1-12

Seats

Fabric ......................................................... 10-6

Heater ......................................................... 1-8

Seat height adjustment (driver’s side) ............. 1-5

Security system ............................................... 2-14

Selector lever (AT vehicles) ............................ 7-15

Self-leveling rear suspension .......................... 7-36

Shift lock release ............................................. 7-18

Shift position indicator ..................................... 3-15

Shopping bag hook ......................................... 6-18

Snow tires ....................................................... 8-13

Snowy and icy roads ....................................... 8-11

Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-23

Specifications .................................................. 12-2

14-7

Index

Speedometer .................................................. 3-5

SRS airbags ................................................... 1-50

SRS

Airbag system warning light ....................... 3-10

Frontal airbag ............................................ 1-55

Side airbag ................................................ 1-63

Storage compartments ................................... 6-4

Sun visors ....................................................... 6-3

Supplemental restraint system airbag ............ 1-50

Synthetic leather upholstery ........................... 10-6

Tachometer .................................................... 3-6

Temperature gauge ........................................ 3-8

Tie-down hooks .............................................. 9-13

Tilt steering wheel .......................................... 3-34

Tire

Chains ....................................................... 8-13

Inspection .................................................. 11-42

Pressures and wear ................................... 11-42

Replacement ............................................. 11-47

Rotation ..................................................... 11-46

Types ......................................................... 11-41

Top tether anchorages ................................... 1-47

Towing ............................................................ 9-13

All wheels on the ground ........................... 9-15

Flat-bed truck ............................................. 9-15

Trailer

Connecting .......................................... 8-23, 8-31

Hitch .....................................................8-22, 8-30

Towing ....................................................... 8-25

Towing tips ................................................ 8-33

Turn signal indicator lights .............................. 3-15

Turn signal lever ............................................. 3-20

Under-floor storage compartment .................. 6-19

Valet mode ..................................................... 2-17

Vanity mirror ................................................... 6-4

Vehicle capacity weight .................................. 8-16

Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-9

Ventilator ........................................................ 4-2

Warning and indicator lights ........................... 3-10

Warning lights

ABS ........................................................... 3-12

Anti-lock Brake system .............................. 3-12

AT OIL TEMPerature ................................. 3-12

Brake system ............................................. 3-13

Charge ....................................................... 3-12

14-8

Index

CHECK ENGINE ....................................... 3-11

Door open .................................................. 3-15

Front-wheel drive ....................................... 3-15

Low fuel ..................................................... 3-15

Oil pressure ............................................... 3-12

Seatbelt ................................................1-14, 3-10

SRS airbag system .................................... 3-10

Warranties and maintenance ......................... 8-25

Washing ......................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing ..................................... 10-3

Wear indicators .............................................. 11-45

Wheel

Alignment .................................................. 12-5

Aluminum ................................................... 11-48

Balance ..................................................... 11-45

Replacement ............................................. 11-47

Windows ......................................................... 2-21

Windshield

Washer fluid ............................................... 11-49

Wiper and washer switches ....................... 3-24

Wiper deicer .............................................. 3-27

Windshield wiper blades

Replacement ............................................. 11-50

Winter driving ................................................. 8-10

Wiper and washer .......................................... 3-22

HSF028AA

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel:

2.5 Liter models

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rat-

ing of 87 AKI or higher.

2.5 Liter (Turbo) models

Use premium unleaded gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium un-

leaded gasoline is not available, regular un-

leaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI or

higher may be temporarily used. For optimum

engine performance and driveability, it is rec-

ommended that you use premium grade un-

leaded gasoline.

Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the Re-

search Octane and Motor numbers and is com-

monly referred to as the Anti Knock Index

(AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.

Fuel capacity:

15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

Engine oil:

Use only API classification SL with the words

“ENERGY CONSERVING” and the New API

certification mark (starburst mark) displayed on

the container (ILSAC GF-3).

Engine oil capacity:

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

Cold tire pressure:

See the label located under the driver’s door

latch.

Subaru 2004 Forester X Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation